GDU™ 620

Installation Manual

190-00601-04 August 2020 Revision AD

 ©2007-2020 Garmin International, Inc., or its subsidiaries
All Rights Reserved
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted,
disseminated, downloaded or stored in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express prior
written consent of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this manual and
of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed and to
print one copy of this manual or of any revision hereto, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this
manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice and provided further that any
unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin®, FliteCharts®, and SafeTaxi® are registered trademarks of Garmin International or its
subsidiaries. GTN™, SVT™, and GDU™ are trademarks of Garmin International or its subsidiaries.
These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
Iridium® is a registered trademark of Iridium Communications, Inc. Canadian radar data provided by
Environment Canada; United States radar data provided by NOAA; and European radar data collected and
provided by Meteo France.
NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc., ChartView™ is a trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.
SkyWatch®, and Stormscope® are registered trademarks of L-3 Communications.
Ryan®, TCAD®, and Avidyne® are registered trademarks of Avidyne Corporation.
Bendix/King® and Honeywell® are registered trademarks of Honeywell International, Inc.
©2020SiriusXM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM, and all related marks and logos, are trademarks of SiriusXM
Radio Inc. All other marks and logos are property of their respective owners. All rights reserved.
©2020 SD® is a registered trademark of SD-3C, LLC. All rights reserved.
All other product or company names that may be mentioned in this publication are trade names,
trademarks, or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
Refer to flyGarmin.com for aviation product support.
For information regarding the Aviation Limited Warranty, refer to Garmin’s website.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page i
 RECORD OF REVISIONS
Revision Revision Date Description
AD 08/18/20 Added GWX 75 information.
Added GPS 175 and GNX 375 information where applicable.
AC 06/19/19
Removed GWX 75 information.
AB 12/03/18 Added v7.35 functionality.
AA 07/25/18 Added v7.30 functionality.
Z 02/02/17 Added v7.20 functionality.
Y 11/29/16 Corrected pin numbers for GTX 345 in figure C-25.

REVISION AD CHANGE DESCRIPTION

Section Change Description
Page x Added Mod Level 1 and 2 to table in “Mod Level History” section.
1.2.3 Added “/75” to bullet list.
1.4.4 Added “/75” to section.
2.2.3 Changed “GWX 70” to “GWX 68/70/75” in note 7 of table 2-24 “Optional Features.”
2.2.4 Added “/75” to bullet list.
5.5.1.1 Added “GWX 75” to bullet list.
5.5.7.2 Added “/75” to section.
5.5.7.2.3 Added “GWX 75 Weather Radar Page” section.
7.2.1.4 Added “GWX 75” to section.
Appendix C Added “/75” to figure C-17 “WXR Interconnect.”

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page ii
Some differences in operation may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier
or later software versions.
INFORMATION SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL LAWS
This document may contain information which is subject to the Export Administration Regulations (EAR)
issued by the United States Department of Commerce (15 CFR, Chapter VII Subchapter C) and which may
not be exported, released or disclosed to foreign nationals inside or outside the United States without first
obtaining an export license. The preceding statement is required to be included on any and all
reproductions in whole or in part of this manual.

SOFTWARE LICENSE NOTIFICATION

AES ENCRYPTION
The product may include AES file encryption software, © 2002 Dr. Brian Gladman, subject to the
following license:
The free distribution and use of this software in both source and binary form is allowed (with or
without changes) provided:
• Distributions of this source code include the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
• Distributions in binary form include the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other associated materials.
• The copyright holder’s name is not used to endorse products built using this software without
specific written permission.
ALTERNATIVELY, provided this notice is retained in full, this product may be distributed under the
terms of the GNU General Public License (GPL), in which case the provisions of the GPL apply
INSTEAD OF those given above.
Disclaimer
The AES file encryption software is provided “as is” with no explicit or implied warranties in respect
of its properties, including, but not limited to, correctness and/or fitness for purpose.
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR GARMIN AVIATION PRODUCTS
BY USING THE DEVICE, COMPONENT OR SYSTEM MANUFACTURED OR SOLD BY GARMIN
(“THE GARMIN PRODUCT”), YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS
OF THE FOLLOWING SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT. PLEASE READ THIS AGREEMENT
CAREFULLY. Garmin Ltd. and its subsidiaries (“Garmin”) grants you a limited license to use the
software embedded in the Garmin Product (the “Software”) in binary executable form in the normal
operation of the Garmin Product. Title, ownership rights, and intellectual property rights in and to the
Software remain with Garmin and/or its third-party providers. You acknowledge that the Software is the
property of Garmin and/or its third-party providers and is protected under the United States of America
copyright laws and international copyright treaties. You further acknowledge that the structure,
organization, and code of the Software are valuable trade secrets of Garmin and/or its third-party providers
and that the Software in source code form remains a valuable trade secret of Garmin and/or its third-party
providers. You agree not to reproduce, decompile, disassemble, modify, reverse assemble, reverse
engineer, or reduce to human readable form the Software or any part thereof or create any derivative works
based on the Software. You agree not to export or re-export the Software to any country in violation of the
export control laws of the United States of America.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page iii
 DEFINITIONS OF WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES

WARNING
Warnings indicates that injury or death is possible.

CAUTION
Cautions indicate that damage to the equipment is possible.

NOTE
Notes provide additional information.

WARNING
This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This Notice is being
provided in accordance with California's Proposition 65. If you have any questions or
would like additional information, please refer to our website at
www.garmin.com/prop65/.

CAUTION
The GDU 620 has a special anti-reflective coated display that is sensitive to skin oils,
waxes, and abrasive cleaners. Cleaners containing ammonia will harm the anti-reflective
coating. Clean the display with a clean, lint-free cloth and a cleaner that is safe for anti-
reflective coatings.

NOTE
All screen shots in this document are current at the time of publication. Screen shots are
intended to provide visual reference only. Information depicted in screen shots such as
software file names, versions, and part numbers, is subject to change and may not be up to
date.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page iv
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION .............................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 Equipment Description...............................................................................................................1-3
1.3 Definitions and Abbreviations ...................................................................................................1-7
1.4 Interface Summary .....................................................................................................................1-9
1.5 Technical Specifications ..........................................................................................................1-11
1.6 Certification..............................................................................................................................1-12
2 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Installation Materials..................................................................................................................2-2
2.3 Database Options........................................................................................................................2-6
2.4 Reference Material .....................................................................................................................2-7
2.5 Installation Considerations .........................................................................................................2-8
3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.....................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Unpacking Unit ..........................................................................................................................3-2
3.2 Special Tools Required ..............................................................................................................3-2
3.3 Equipment Mounting..................................................................................................................3-2
3.4 Unit Replacement .......................................................................................................................3-4
3.5 Cabling and Wiring ....................................................................................................................3-5
3.6 Backshell Assemblies.................................................................................................................3-7
3.7 Unit Installation........................................................................................................................3-18
3.8 Continued Airworthiness..........................................................................................................3-18
4 SYSTEM INTERCONNECTS .........................................................................................................4-1
4.1 Pin Function List ........................................................................................................................4-2
4.2 Functional Descriptions..............................................................................................................4-8
5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND CHECKOUT .......................................................................5-1
5.1 Post Installation Power Check....................................................................................................5-2
5.2 GDU 620 Software Loading ......................................................................................................5-2
5.3 Initial Configuration of the GDU 620 ........................................................................................5-3
5.4 GDU 620 System Status Page (PFD Side).................................................................................5-4
5.5 GDU 620 System Setup and Checkout Pages (MFD Side) .......................................................5-6
6 RESERVED ........................................................................................................................................6-1
7 LIMITATIONS ..................................................................................................................................7-1
7.1 Operation ....................................................................................................................................7-1
7.2 Installation ..................................................................................................................................7-1
8 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ..........................................................................................................8-1
8.1 Continued Airworthiness............................................................................................................8-1
APPENDIX A ENVIRONMENTAL QUALIFICATION FORM...................................................A-1
APPENDIX B OUTLINE AND INSTALLATION DRAWINGS ................................................... B-1
APPENDIX C INTERCONNECT DRAWINGS ..............................................................................C-1

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page v
 LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1-1 GDU 620 Unit View (RH and LH PFD)...............................................................................1-3
Figure 1-2 GDU 620 Description ...........................................................................................................1-5
Figure 3-1 Connector and Backshell Assembly ...................................................................................3-10
Figure 3-2 Shielded Cable Preparation.................................................................................................3-11
Figure 3-3 Shield Termination on Backshell Assembly.......................................................................3-12
Figure 3-4 Backshell Assembly (Configuration Module with Spacer) ................................................3-16
Figure 3-5 Backshell Assembly (Potted Configuration Module) .........................................................3-17
Figure 5-1 PFD Screens of GDU 620.....................................................................................................5-4
Figure 5-2 Configuration Page Navigation.............................................................................................5-7
Figure 5-3 System Configuration Page...................................................................................................5-8
Figure 5-4 G500/G600/G500H Airframe Configuration Page .............................................................5-11
Figure 5-5 Airspeed Configuration Page – Basic IAS Tape.................................................................5-13
Figure 5-6 Airspeed Configuration Page – Advanced IAS Tape .........................................................5-15
Figure 5-7 Lighting Configuration Page...............................................................................................5-18
Figure 5-8 Manifest Configuration Page ..............................................................................................5-20
Figure 5-9 Software Upload Page.........................................................................................................5-21
Figure 5-10 Software Upload Page with LRUs ......................................................................................5-23
Figure 5-11 G500/G600/G500H Feature Configuration Page................................................................5-26
Figure 5-12 Audio Alert Configuration Page .........................................................................................5-29
Figure 5-13 ARINC Port Config Page....................................................................................................5-30
Figure 5-14 RS Port Config Page ...........................................................................................................5-45
Figure 5-15 Terrain Proximity Setup Page .............................................................................................5-47
Figure 5-16 Terrain-SVT Setup Page .....................................................................................................5-48
Figure 5-17 TAWS-B Setup Page ..........................................................................................................5-50
Figure 5-18 Terrain-HSVT Setup Page ..................................................................................................5-52
Figure 5-19 Video Configuration Page...................................................................................................5-54
Figure 5-20 Discrete Configuration Page ...............................................................................................5-56
Figure 5-21 Miscellaneous GDU Configuration Page............................................................................5-58
Figure 5-22 AHRS/Air Data Input Page.................................................................................................5-59
Figure 5-23 AHRS Configuration Page..................................................................................................5-62
Figure 5-24 AHRS/GMU Calibration Page............................................................................................5-64
Figure 5-25 G500/G600/G500H ADC Configuration Page ...................................................................5-66
Figure 5-26 ADC Configuration.............................................................................................................5-69
Figure 5-27 GDL 69 Page.......................................................................................................................5-71
Figure 5-28 Autopilot Configuration Page .............................................................................................5-73
Figure 5-29 Flight Director Page ............................................................................................................5-76
Figure 5-30 Flight Director Cal Page .....................................................................................................5-78
Figure 5-31 Autopilot Test Page.............................................................................................................5-80
Figure 5-32 GAD 43 Page ......................................................................................................................5-82
Figure 5-33 GAD 43e Page ....................................................................................................................5-84
Figure 5-34 GAD 43e Calibration Page .................................................................................................5-86
Figure 5-35 A708 Weather Radar Page ..................................................................................................5-87
Figure 5-36 GWX Weather Radar Page (GWX 68) ...............................................................................5-89
Figure 5-37 GWX Weather Radar Page (GWX 70) ...............................................................................5-91
Figure 5-38 GWX Weather Radar Page (GWX 75) ...............................................................................5-93
Figure 5-39 Stormscope Configuration Page..........................................................................................5-95
Figure 5-40 Stormscope Data Configuration Page .................................................................................5-97
Figure 5-41 GTS Status and Configuration Page ...................................................................................5-98

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page vi
 LIST OF FIGURES CONTINUED
Figure 5-42 GTS Port Configuration Page ...........................................................................................5-101
Figure 5-43 Iridium Configuration Page ..............................................................................................5-103
Figure 5-44 Position Reporting Page....................................................................................................5-104
Figure 5-45 EIS Configuration Page ....................................................................................................5-105
Figure 5-46 Configuration Upload Page...............................................................................................5-106
Figure 5-47 Gauge Configuration Page ................................................................................................5-107
Figure 5-48 GEA Configuration Page ..................................................................................................5-109
Figure 5-49 Exceedance Log Page .......................................................................................................5-110
Figure 5-50 Port Monitoring Page ........................................................................................................5-111
Figure 5-51 Input Monitoring Page ......................................................................................................5-112
Figure 5-52 Outputs Page .....................................................................................................................5-113
Figure 5-53 Engine Data Page ..............................................................................................................5-114
Figure 5-54 GEA Status Page...............................................................................................................5-115
Figure 5-55 Error Log Page ..................................................................................................................5-116
Figure B-1 Connector Locations ............................................................................................................ B-2
Figure B-2 Maximum Viewing Angle ................................................................................................... B-3
Figure B-3 GDU 620 Dimensions and Center of Gravity...................................................................... B-4
Figure B-4 Trim Plate P/N 115-01009-( ) .............................................................................................. B-5
Figure B-5 Cutout Template P/N 115-01010-00.................................................................................... B-6
Figure B-6 Instrument Panel Cutout....................................................................................................... B-7
Figure B-7 Typical Installation – Thin Trim Plate................................................................................. B-8
Figure B-8 Typical Installation – Thick Trim Plate ............................................................................... B-9
Figure C-1 Power, Configuration Module, and Lighting - Single GDU Interconnect........................... C-2
Figure C-2 Power, Configuration Module, and Lighting - Dual GDU Interconnect ............................. C-3
Figure C-3 Attitude - GRS 79/GDC 72 Air Data - Single GDU Interconnect....................................... C-6
Figure C-4 Attitude - GRS 79/GDC 72 Air Data - Dual GDU Interconnect ......................................... C-7
Figure C-5 Attitude - GRS 77/GDC 74 Air Data - Single GDU Interconnect....................................... C-9
Figure C-6 Attitude - GRS 77/GDC 74 Air Data - Dual GDU Interconnect ....................................... C-10
Figure C-7 Attitude - GSU 75 Air Data - Single GDU Interconnect ................................................... C-11
Figure C-8 Attitude - GSU 75 Air Data - Dual GDU Interconnect...................................................... C-12
Figure C-9 GPS - Single GDU Interconnect ........................................................................................ C-14
Figure C-10 GPS - Dual GDU Interconnect........................................................................................... C-16
Figure C-11 NAV - Single GDU Interconnect....................................................................................... C-18
Figure C-12 NAV - Dual GDU Interconnect ......................................................................................... C-19
Figure C-13 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect .............................................................................. C-21
Figure C-14 Audio Interconnect............................................................................................................. C-24
Figure C-15 GDL 69/69A Interconnect ................................................................................................. C-25
Figure C-16 Stormscope Interconnect.................................................................................................... C-26
Figure C-17 WXR Interconnect ............................................................................................................. C-28
Figure C-18 Traffic Interconnect............................................................................................................ C-30
Figure C-19 ADF Interconnect............................................................................................................... C-33
Figure C-20 GAD 43/43e Interconnect .................................................................................................. C-34
Figure C-21 Video Interconnect............................................................................................................. C-36
Figure C-22 GSR Interconnect............................................................................................................... C-37
Figure C-23 Radar Altimeter Interconnect............................................................................................. C-38
Figure C-24 GEA Interconnect .............................................................................................................. C-39
Figure C-25 ADS-B/FIS-B Interconnect................................................................................................ C-41

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page vii
 LIST OF TABLES
Table 1-1 Physical Characteristics .....................................................................................................1-11
Table 1-2 General Specifications .......................................................................................................1-11
Table 1-3 Power Specifications ..........................................................................................................1-11
Table 1-4 Display Specifications ........................................................................................................1-11
Table 1-5 TSO/ETSO Compliance (SW v2.xx) .................................................................................1-12
Table 1-6 TSO/ETSO Compliance (SW v3.xx) .................................................................................1-14
Table 1-7 TSO/ETSO Compliance (SW v4.xx) .................................................................................1-16
Table 1-8 TSO/ETSO Compliance (SW v5.xx) .................................................................................1-18
Table 1-9 TSO/ETSO Compliance (SW v6.xx) .................................................................................1-20
Table 1-10 TSO/ETSO Compliance (SW v7.xx) .................................................................................1-23
Table 1-11 Software Design Assurance ...............................................................................................1-27
Table 1-12 TSO/ETSO Deviations .......................................................................................................1-28
Table 1-13 Non-TSO Functions ...........................................................................................................1-33
Table 2-1 Catalog Part Numbers ..........................................................................................................2-2
Table 2-2 Installation Accessories ........................................................................................................2-2
Table 2-3 Accessories Provided Separately .........................................................................................2-3
Table 2-4 Optional Features Available .................................................................................................2-3
Table 2-5 Database Options (GDU SW v6.21 or Earlier) ....................................................................2-6
Table 2-6 Database Options (GDU SW v7.00 or Later) ......................................................................2-6
Table 2-7 Reference Material ...............................................................................................................2-7
Table 3-1 Socket Contact Part Numbers ..............................................................................................3-6
Table 3-2 Recommended Crimp Tools ................................................................................................3-6
Table 3-3 Backshell Assembly .............................................................................................................3-7
Table 3-4 Configuration Module Wire Color Reference Chart ..........................................................3-15
Table 3-5 Configuration Module Kit - 011-00979-02 ........................................................................3-15
Table 3-6 Configuration Module Kit - P/N 011-00979-05 ................................................................3-17
Table 4-1 Aircraft Power/Ground ........................................................................................................4-8
Table 4-2 Configuration Module Pins ..................................................................................................4-8
Table 4-3 RS-232 Ports .......................................................................................................................4-9
Table 4-4 ARINC 429 ........................................................................................................................4-10
Table 4-5 Ethernet ..............................................................................................................................4-11
Table 4-6 RS-422/RS-485 ..................................................................................................................4-11
Table 4-7 Lighting ..............................................................................................................................4-12
Table 4-8 Heading and Course Datum Output ...................................................................................4-12
Table 4-9 Deviation Outputs ..............................................................................................................4-13
Table 4-10 Flag Outputs .......................................................................................................................4-13
Table 4-11 Superflag Outputs ..............................................................................................................4-13
Table 4-12 Flight Director ....................................................................................................................4-14
Table 4-13 Discrete Inputs ...................................................................................................................4-14
Table 4-14 Discrete Outputs .................................................................................................................4-17
Table 4-15 ADF Input ..........................................................................................................................4-19
Table 4-16 ARINC 453/708 Inputs ......................................................................................................4-19
Table 4-17 Time Mark Inputs ...............................................................................................................4-20
Table 4-18 Message Audio Output .......................................................................................................4-20
Table 4-19 Composite Video Inputs ....................................................................................................4-20
Table 5-1 ARINC 429 Input Selections .............................................................................................5-31
Table 5-2 GPS NAVIGATOR Labels (ARINC 429 Output #1 Only) ...............................................5-33
Table 5-3 AUTOPILOT (ARINC 429 Output #2 Only) ....................................................................5-34

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page viii
 LIST OF TABLES CONTINUED
Table 5-4 DFCS 1 (ARINC 429 Output #2 Only) .............................................................................5-35
Table 5-5 GENERAL PURPOSE 1 (ARINC 429 Output #3 and #4 Only) ......................................5-36
Table 5-6 GENERAL PURPOSE 2 (ARINC 429 Output #3 and #4 Only) ......................................5-37
Table 5-7 WX RADAR (ARINC 429 Output #3 or #4 Only) (software v5.00 or Later) ..................5-37
Table 5-8 DFCS 2 (ARINC 429 Output #2 Only) .............................................................................5-38
Table 5-9 DFCS 4 (ARINC 429 Output #2 Only) (Software v5.02 or Later) ....................................5-39
Table 5-10 DFCS 5 (ARINC Output #2 Only) (Software v6.10 or Later) ...........................................5-40
Table 5-11 DFCS 6 (ARINC 429 Output #2 Only) (Software v7.20 or Later) ....................................5-41
Table 5-12 GFC 500 .............................................................................................................................5-42
Table 5-13 GFC 500 NAV ...................................................................................................................5-43
Table 5-14 CDI Source Bits .................................................................................................................5-44
Table 5-15 RS-232 Port Selection ........................................................................................................5-46
Table 5-16 Default Discrete Output Configuration ..............................................................................5-55
Table 5-17 Discrete Configuration Selections .....................................................................................5-56
Table 5-18 Discrete Input Function Selections ....................................................................................5-57

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page ix
 GDU 620 HARDWARE MOD LEVEL HISTORY
The following table identifies hardware modification (Mod) Levels for the GDU 620. Mod Levels are
listed with the associated service bulletin number, service bulletin date, and the purpose of the
modification. The table is current at the time of publication of this manual (refer to the effective date on
cover page) and is subject to change without notice. Authorized Garmin Sales and Service Centers are
encouraged to access the most up-to-date bulletin and advisory information on the Garmin Dealer
Resource website at www.garmin.com using their Garmin-provided user name and password.

SERVICE BULLETIN SERVICE

MOD LEVEL PURPOSE OF MODIFICATION
NUMBER BULLETIN DATE
1 N/A N/A Improved reliability of fast blow fuse.
Improved connection between display
2 N/A N/A
driver and LCD display.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page x
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 Equipment Description .....................................................................................................................1-3
1.2.1 Flight Instrument Functions .......................................................................................................1-3
1.2.2 Navigation Instrument Functions ...............................................................................................1-3
1.2.3 System Interface Functions ........................................................................................................1-4
1.2.4 Other Functions ..........................................................................................................................1-4
1.3 Definitions and Abbreviations ..........................................................................................................1-7
1.4 Interface Summary............................................................................................................................1-9
1.4.1 ARINC 429 Interfaces................................................................................................................1-9
1.4.2 RS-232 Interface ........................................................................................................................1-9
1.4.3 RS-422/RS-485 Interface ...........................................................................................................1-9
1.4.4 Ethernet Interface .......................................................................................................................1-9
1.4.5 Configuration Module Interface.................................................................................................1-9
1.4.6 Autopilot Interface .....................................................................................................................1-9
1.4.7 ADF Input ................................................................................................................................1-10
1.4.8 ARINC 453/708 Inputs ............................................................................................................1-10
1.4.9 Composite Video Inputs (software v4.00 or later) ...................................................................1-10
1.4.10 Lighting Bus Input ...................................................................................................................1-10
1.4.11 Time Mark Input ......................................................................................................................1-10
1.4.12 Discrete Inputs and Outputs .....................................................................................................1-10
1.4.13 Message Audio Output.............................................................................................................1-10
1.5 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................................1-11
1.5.1 Environmental Qualification Form ..........................................................................................1-11
1.6 Certification ....................................................................................................................................1-12

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-1
1.1 Introduction

NOTE
Except where specifically noted, references made to the GDU 620 shall apply equally to
all GDU 620 variants used with the G500, G500H and G600.

NOTE
Garmin recommends installation of the GDU 620 by a Garmin-authorized installer. To the
extent allowable by law, Garmin will not be liable for damages resulting from improper or
negligent installation of the GDU 620. For questions, contact Garmin Aviation Product
Support at (888) 606-5482.

NOTE
The part number of the GDU 620 that is used with the G500, G500H or G600 system is
different depending upon which system it is used with.

This manual is intended to provide mechanical and electrical information for use in the planning and
design of an installation of the GDU 620 into an aircraft. This manual is not a substitute for an approved
airframe-specific maintenance manual, installation design drawing, or complete installation data package.
Attempting to install equipment by reference to this manual alone and without first planning or designing
an installation specific to your aircraft may compromise your safety and is not recommended. The content
of this manual assumes use by competent and qualified avionics engineering personnel and/or avionics
installation specialist using standard maintenance practices in accordance with Title 14 of the Code of
Federal Regulation and other relevant accepted practices.
The GDU 620 PFD/MFD is the control display device for the G500, G500H, and G600 Integrated Flight
Decks. The G500/G500H/G600 is an advanced technology avionics suite designed to replace the standard
six-pack of instruments.
 ADI
 HSI/CDI
 Airspeed indicator
 Altimeter
 Turn coordinator (if installed)
 Vertical speed indicator (if installed)
The system combines primary flight instrumentation, aircraft systems instrumentation, and navigational
information, all displayed on dual 6.5" color screens.
The GDU 620 PFD/MFDs used in the G500 and G600 systems are similar with respect to fit, form, and
function. They contain the same bezel, soft keys, hard keys, rotary knobs, displays and backlights, except
that the left and right hand versions have the front face reversed. The difference between the G500 and
G600 version of the GDU 620 PFD/MFD is the hardware and software part numbers. The software for the
G500 version is certified to different DO-178B levels and supports fewer features than the G600 version;
otherwise, the two versions of the GDU 620 are similar from a pilot/installer perspective. Refer to
section 1.6 for a complete list of supported TSOs and DO-178B levels.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-2
 Figure 1-1 GDU 620 Unit View (RH and LH PFD)

1.2 Equipment Description

1.2.1 Flight Instrument Functions
 Display of attitude (pitch and roll), rate of turn, slip/skid, heading, airspeed, altitude, and vertical
speed information
 Display of CDI/VDI/Flags along with ARINC 429 roll steering output
 Emulation of both course and heading error signals for both AC and DC HSIs
1.2.2 Navigation Instrument Functions
 Display of position and ground speed for use by the pilot/flight crew
 Display of stored navigation and map databases for use by the pilot/flight crew
 Control and display of the HSI, RMI, selected heading and selected courses (PFD only)
 Area navigation functions using the determined position/velocity and stored navigation data
 Approach navigation functions and associated databases

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-3
1.2.3 System Interface Functions
 Interfacing with an approved GPS navigator (GNS 480, GNS 400W Series, GNS 500W Series,
GTN 6XX Series, GTN 7XX series, GPS 175, and GNX 375)
 Interfacing with the GRS 77 (includes GMU 44 interface)
 Interfacing with the GRS 79 (includes GMU44 interface)
 Interfacing with the GSU 75 (includes GMU 44 interface)
 Interfacing with the GDC 72( )
 Interfacing with the GDC 74( )
 Interfacing with the GFC 600 autopilot
 Interfacing with the GFC 500 autopilot
 Interfacing to approved 3rd party autopilots to provide heading and course datum information,
lateral and vertical deviation information, roll steering information, and attitude and air data
information
 Display of information obtained from dual NAV receivers
(400W Series, 500W Series, GNS 480, GTN 6XX, GTN 7XX, and SL30)
 Display of information obtained from a traffic system
 Display of information obtained from a Garmin ADS-B/FIS-B system
(GDL 88, GTS 8XX, GTX 345, GNX 375)
 Display of information obtained from an ADF receiver
 Interfacing to an external audio system for aural alerts
 Display and control of the GDL 69/69A
 Display and control of the GWX 68/70/75
(standard on G600, enabled with optional enablement card on G500)
 Display and control ARINC 708 weather radar – GDU 620 #1 or #2
(enabled with optional enablement card on G500 and G600)
 Output of RS-232 altitude data
 Interfacing with the GAD 43 to provide analog attitude, heading, and baro-correction to suitable
autopilots (standard on G600, enabled with optional enablement card on G500)
 Display of information obtained from a video camera
 Interfacing with the GSR 56 Iridium phone system to provide position reporting, Garmin Flight
Data Service (GFDS), and telephone (enabled with the optional enablement card on G500)
 Radar Altitude Display (enabled with optional enablement card on G500 and G600)
 Interfacing with the GEA 7X to provide engine information system (EIS)
(enabled with optional enablement card on G500H)
1.2.4 Other Functions

NOTE
In EIS Composite Mode the MFD screen will not be available.

 TAWS-B alerting and display – G600 only (enabled with optional enablement card)
 Synthetic Vision display on PFD (standard on G600, enabled with optional enablement card on
G500)

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-4
Heading Select
Range Select
Course Select

Altitude Select Menu

Vertical Speed Select Clear

Barometric Correction Enter

PFD Knob Inner MFD Knob

(Select Page)
Bottom SD Card Slot
Outer MFD Knob
Soft Keys (Database Loader Card) Soft Keys
(Select Page Group)
Top SD Card Slot
(Software Loader Card)

Left Hand PFD

Heading Select
Range Select
Course Select

Menu Altitude Select

Clear Vertical Speed Select

Enter Barometric Correction

Inner MFD Knob PFD Knob

(Select Page)

Outer MFD Knob

(Select Page Group) Right Hand PFD
Figure 1-2 GDU 620 Description
Sheet 1 of 2

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-5
 Range Select
These keys
have no
Menu function when
EIS normal mode
Clear is active.

Enter

Inner MFD Knob

(Select Page)

Outer MFD Knob

Soft Keys Bottom SD Card Slot
(Select Page Group)
(Database Loader Card) Soft Keys
Top SD Card Slot
(Software Loader Card)

EIS Primary Mode (G500H Only)

Heading Select

These keys Course Select

have no
function when
Altitude Select
EIS composite
mode is active.
Vertical Speed Select

Barometric Correction

MFD Knob PFD Knob

(Inner or outer knobs
will scroll through alerts.)
Soft Keys Bottom SD Card Slot
Soft Keys
(Database Loader Card)
Top SD Card Slot
(Software Loader Card)

EIS Composite Mode (G500H Only)

Figure 1-2 GDU 620 Description
Sheet 2 of 2

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-6
1.3 Definitions and Abbreviations
Definitions
G500/G500H/G600 refers to the entire integrated flight deck system including the GDU 620 and
associated equipment.
The GDU 620 refers to the control display device for the G500/G500H/G600 system. Unless specifically
noted, references made to the GDU 620 will equally apply to all GDU 620 variants.
Abbreviations
The following abbreviations/acronyms are used within this document:

ADAS Automated Weather Observing System FD Flight Director

Data Acquisition System
ADF Automatic Direction Finding FIS-B Flight Information Services-Broadcast
ADI Automatic De-Ice and Inhibitor FLTA Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
ADS-B Automatic Dependent Surveillance- FXD Fixed
Broadcast
AFF Automatic Flight Following GAD Garmin Gyro Adapter
AFM Aircraft Flight Manual GDC Garmin Air Data Computer
AGCS Air-Ground Communication System GDL Garmin Data Link
AHRS Attitude Heading Reference System GDU Garmin Display Unit
ALT Altitude GEA Garmin Engine and Airframe Unit
AWG American Wire Gauge GFDS Garmin Flight Data Service
CDI Course Deviation Indicator GMU Garmin GPS Monitoring Unit
CDU Control Display Unit GNS Garmin Navigation System
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Checking GPS Global Positioning System
CRS Course GPSS Global Positioning System Steering
DFCS Digital Flight Control System GRS Garmin AHRS
DME Distance Measuring Equipment GS Glideslope
EEPROM Electrical Erasable Programmable GSR Garmin Satellite Receiver
Read Only Memory
EFIS Electronic Flight Instrumentation GSU Garmin Sensor Unit
System
EIS Engine Indication System GTN Garmin Touchscreen Navigation
System
EMI Electromagnetic interference GTS Garmin Traffic System
EQF Environmental Qualification Form GTX Garmin digital transponder
ETM Engine Trend Monitoring GWX Garmin Weather Radar
ETSO European Technical Standard Order HDG Heading
EUROCAE European Organisation for Civil HSDB High-Speed Data Bus
Aviation Equipment
FAA Federal Aviation Authority HSI Horizontal Situation Indicator

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-7
HSVT Helicopter Synthetic Vision ROC Rate of Climb
Technology
HTAWS Helicopter Terrain Awareness and RMI Radio Magnetic Indicator
Warning System
IAS Indicated Airspeed RTCA Radio Technical Commission for
Aeronautics
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics RUDICS Router-Based Unrestricted Digital
Engineers Internetworking Connectivity
Solutions
ILS Instrument Landing System RVSM Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum
IOI Imminent Obstacle Impact SD Secure Digital
ITI Imminent Terrain Impact STC Supplemental Type Certificate
LH Left Hand SVT Synthetic Vision Technology
LOC Localizer SW Software
MFD Multi-function Display TAS Traffic Advisory System
NTSC National Television System Committee TAWS Terrain Awareness and Warning
System
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer TC Type Certificate
PAL Programmable Array Logic TCAS Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance
System
PCB Printed Circuit Board TIS Traffic Information Service
PFD Primary Flight Display TSO Technical Standard Order
POH Pilot’s Operating Handbook VAR Variable
PSI Pounds per square inch VDI Vertical Deviation Indicator
RA Radio Altitude VLOC VOR/Localizer
RF Radio Frequency VS Vertical Speed
RH Right Hand WXR Weather Radar

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-8
1.4 Interface Summary
The GDU 620 is designed as an open architecture system that uses ARINC 429, RS-232, RS-422/485, and
Garmin Ethernet communications interfaces. Various analog interfaces are supported. A detailed
description of all relevant interfaces can be found in the following sections.
1.4.1 ARINC 429 Interfaces
The GDU 620 has a total of eight ports, including six that are user-configurable ARINC 429 input ports,
and four ARINC 429 output ports. Each port can be configured for low or high speed operation. The
GDU 620 can be set up to receive air data, attitude data, GPS data, and traffic data. GDU 620 software
v6.10 or later can receive autopilot mode annunciations, flight director, and fast/slow indication. The
outputs can be configured to output ARINC 429 data in various formats. GDU 620 software v5.00 or later
supports ARINC 429 radar altimeter input and display.
1.4.2 RS-232 Interface
The GDU 620 has a total of eight RS-232 serial ports, including three that are user-configurable. The serial
ports can be configured to receive RS-232 data from various sources, including 400W/500W Series units,
GNS 480, SL30, or GAD 43/43e. These ports can be configured to transmit RS-232 serial data in various
formats, including Shadin altitude format.
1.4.3 RS-422/RS-485 Interface
The GDU 620 has four user-configurable, bi-directional RS-422/RS-485 ports. Each port can be
configured for RS-422 transmit, RS-422 receive, or RS-485 bi-directional operation. The serial ports can
receive/transmit serial data from/to various sources. The RS-485 format is used to communicate with the
GEA 7X unit(s) (G500H only).
1.4.4 Ethernet Interface
The GDU 620 has two bi-directional ethernet interfaces. The ethernet ports can be configured to receive
ethernet data from various sources, including another GDU 620, a GDL 69/69A, and a GWX 68/70/75
weather radar.
1.4.5 Configuration Module Interface
The GDU 620 has one interface to an external configuration module. This allows the GDU 620 to store
installation-specific configuration data, allowing the GDU 620 to be replaced without the need for
reconfiguration of the new unit.
1.4.6 Autopilot Interface
The GDU 620 is capable of interfacing to numerous autopilots, as described in the following sections.
1.4.6.1 Analog Deviation Output
The GDU 620 has one set of lateral and vertical deviation outputs and associated low-level flag and
superflag outputs. These outputs are provided for the autopilot and will reflect the navigation source that is
currently selected for navigation on the HSI.
1.4.6.2 ARINC 429 Output
The GDU 620 provides one ARINC 429 output for use with compatible autopilots. This output can be
configured to support various autopilot types. The GDU 620 can accept autopilot mode annunciations over
ARINC 429 (software v6.10 or later).
1.4.6.3 Heading and Course Datum Outputs
The GDU 620 can provide AC or DC heading and course datum outputs. An input for AC reference
voltage is provided and is used with autopilots that use AC datums.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-9
1.4.6.4 Flight Director Interface
The GDU 620 accepts pitch and roll analog inputs and an associated Active-High enable input. This input
can be configured to support various FD inputs. GDU 620 software v6.10 or later accepts flight director
over ARINC 429.
1.4.7 ADF Input
The GDU 620 has one interface that allows the ADF bearing to be displayed on the HSI as a bearing
pointer. This input allows ADFs that provide a DC SIN/COS output to be connected to the GDU 620.
There is no ability to control the ADF in the GDU 620.
1.4.8 ARINC 453/708 Inputs
The GDU 620 has two ARINC 453/708 inputs that will allow weather radar to be displayed on the
GDU 620. GDU 620 software v5.00 or later supports the display of weather radar.
1.4.9 Composite Video Inputs (software v4.00 or later)
The GDU 620 has two composite video inputs that allow video to be displayed on the MFD.
1.4.10 Lighting Bus Input
The GDU 620 has a lighting bus input. The GDU 620 can be configured to track 28 VDC, 14 VDC,
5 VDC, or 5 VAC lighting buses using this input. Alternatively, the GDU 620 can be configured to
automatically adjust for ambient lighting conditions based on its photocell.
1.4.11 Time Mark Input
The GDU 620 has two differential time mark inputs, one for GPS 1 and the other for GPS 2 (if installed).
These are used to accurately determine the time of GPS messages that are sent to the GRS 77 AHRS.
1.4.12 Discrete Inputs and Outputs
The GDU 620 has ten discrete inputs (eight Active-Low and two Active-High) and eight Active-Low
discrete outputs. These are user-configurable and support interfacing to a wide variety of systems.
1.4.13 Message Audio Output
The GDU 620 has one 500 W audio output that can be connected to an audio panel, providing audible
messages to the pilot. This output provides the altitude alerter chime and internal SVT-Terrain/TAWS
aural alerts.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-10
1.5 Technical Specifications
1.5.1 Environmental Qualification Form
It is the responsibility of the installing agency to obtain the latest revision of the GDU 620 Environmental
Qualification Form. The GDU 620 Environmental Qualification form, P/N 005-00313-20, is available
directly from Garmin. To obtain a copy of this form, refer to the Garmin Dealer Resource Center.

Table 1-1 Physical Characteristics

Characteristics Specifications
Width 10.0 inches (25.4 cm)
Height 6.7 inches (17.0 cm)
Depth with Connector Kit 5.50 inches (14.0 cm)
Unit Weight w/out Connector Kit 6.38 pounds (2.90 kg)
Unit Weight with Connector Kit 7.04 pounds (3.20 kg)

Table 1-2 General Specifications

Characteristic Specifications
Operating Temperature Range -20°C to +55°C
Humidity 48 Hours 50°C 95%
Altitude Range 55,000 ft (maximum)
Input Voltage Range 10 to 40 VDC
Brightness Range 0.1 to 180fL

Table 1-3 Power Specifications

14 Volt Current Draw 28 Volt Current Draw
LRU
Typical Maximum Typical Maximum
GDU 620 3.9A 5.4A 1.9A 2.7A

Table 1-4 Display Specifications

Characteristic Specifications
Active Display Size 6.5" Diagonal (3.9" W x 5.2" H)
Display Format 480 pixels (W) x 640 pixels (H)
Left: 45° from perpendicular
Right: 45° from perpendicular
Viewing Angle (with 10:1 contrast ratio min)
Up: 30° from perpendicular
Down: 10° from perpendicular

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-11
 1.6 Certification
The GDU 620 has been shown to meet compliance with the claimed TSO(s) when interfaced with the
equipment defined in this installation manual, and installed in accordance with the requirements and
limitations as defined in this installation manual.
The installer should verify that non-Garmin devices to be interfaced meet the installation requirements
identified in this manual to assure the installed system will comply with the Garmin TSO/ETSO
Authorization. Garmin installation requirements will usually specify that the interfaced device has
appropriate TSO/ETSO authorization, and in some cases, such as for TSO-C144 antennas, may require
that the non-Garmin device meet additional Garmin specifications.

Table 1-5 TSO/ETSO Compliance (SW v2.xx)

TSO/ETSO Applicable LRU Applicable

Function SAE/RTCA/ Category SW P/Ns Custom Logic
EUROCAE (GDU 620 G600) Device P/Ns
TSO-C2d 006-C0079-21
Type C 006-B00498-04
ETSO-C2d 006-C0078-21
Airspeed Instruments Range : 20 to through
SAE AS8019A 006-C0093-21
999 kts 006-B00498-06
Incomplete System [1] 006-C0094-21
TSO-C3d 006-C0079-21
006-B00498-04
ETSO-C3d 006-C0078-21
Turn and Slip Instrument Type II through
SAE AS8004 006-C0093-21
006-B00498-06
Incomplete System [1] 006-C0094-21
TSO-C4c 006-C0079-21
006-B00498-04
Bank and Pitch ETSO-C4c Turn Error, 006-C0078-21
through
Instruments SAE AS8001 Category A 006-C0093-21
006-B00498-06
Incomplete System [1] 006-C0094-21
TSO-C6d 006-C0079-21
006-B00498-04
Direction (Heading) ETSO-C6d 006-C0078-21
through
Instrument, Magnetic SAE AS8013A 006-C0093-21
006-B00498-06
Incomplete System [1] 006-C0094-21
TSO-C8d 006-C0079-21
Vertical Velocity Type C 006-B00498-04
ETSO-C8d 006-C0078-21
Instruments (Rate-Of- Range: -9950 through
SAE AS8016A 006-C0093-21
Climb) to 9950 ft/min 006-B00498-06
Incomplete System [1] 006-C0094-21
TSO-C10b 006-C0079-21
006-B00498-04
Altimeter, Pressure ETSO-C10b Range: -1000 006-C0078-21
through
Actuated, Sensitive Type SAE AS8009A to 99,980 ft 006-C0093-21
006-B00498-06
Incomplete System [1] 006-C0094-21
ILS Glide Slope
TSO-C34e
Receiving Equipment 006-C0079-21
ETSO-2C34f 006-B00498-04
Operating Within The 006-C0078-21
RTCA DO-192 through
Radio Frequency Range 006-C0093-21
EUROCAE ED-47B 006-B00498-06
of 328.6-335.4 Megahertz 006-C0094-21
Incomplete System [1]
(MHz)

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-12
 TSO/ETSO Applicable LRU Applicable
Function SAE/RTCA/ Category SW P/Ns Custom Logic
EUROCAE (GDU 620 G600) Device P/Ns
Airborne ILS Localizer
TSO-C36e
Receiving Equipment 006-C0079-21
ETSO-2C36f 006-B00498-04
Operating Within The 006-C0078-21
RTCA DO-195 through
Radio Frequency Range 006-C0093-21
EUROCAE ED-46B 006-B00498-06
of 108-112 Megahertz 006-C0094-21
Incomplete System [1]
(MHz)
VOR Receiving
TSO-C40c 006-C0079-21
Equipment Operating 006-B00498-04
ETSO-2C40c 006-C0078-21
Within The Radio through
RTCA DO-196 006-C0093-21
Frequency Range Of 108- 006-B00498-06
Incomplete System [1] 006-C0094-21
117.95 Megahertz (MHz)
TSO-C41d 006-C0079-21
Airborne Automatic 006-B00498-04
ETSO-2C41d 006-C0078-21
Direction Finding through
RTCA DO-179 006-C0093-21
Equipment (ADF) 006-B00498-06
Incomplete System [1] 006-C0094-21
TSO-C52b 006-C0079-21
006-B00498-04
ETSO-C52b 006-C0078-21
Flight Director Equipment through
SAE AS8008 006-C0093-21
006-B00498-06
Incomplete System [1] 006-C0094-21
006-C0079-21
TSO-C113 006-B00498-04
Airborne Multipurpose 006-C0078-21
ETSO-C113 through
Electronic Displays 006-C0093-21
SAE AS8034 006-B00498-06
006-C0094-21
TSO-C118 006-C0079-21
Traffic Alert and Collision 006-B00498-04
ETSO-C118 006-C0078-21
Avoidance System through
RTCA DO-197 006-C0093-21
(TCAS I) 006-B00498-06
Incomplete System [1] 006-C0094-21
TSO-C147 [2] 006-C0079-21
Traffic Advisory System 006-B00498-04
ETSO-C147 006-C0078-21
(TAS) Airborne Class 3 through
RTCA DO-197A 006-C0093-21
Equipment 006-B00498-06
Incomplete System [1] 006-C0094-21

Notes:
[1] The TSOs/ETSOs identified in the table above are for an incomplete system and requires
the GDU 620 to be installed and checked out according to this installation manual.
[2] The GDU 620 displays data for all classes of compatible interfaced TSO-C147/ETSO-C147
authorized equipment. The GDU 620 equipment class is identical to that of the interfaced
equipment.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-13
 Table 1-6 TSO/ETSO Compliance (SW v3.xx)

TSO/ETSO Applicable LRU Applicable LRU Applicable

Function SAE/RTCA/ Category SW P/Ns SW P/Ns Custom Logic
EUROCAE (GDU 620 G500) (GDU 620 G600) Device P/Ns
Type C 006-C0079-21
TSO-C2d
Range: 006-C0078-21
Airspeed Instruments ETSO-C2d 006-B1071-1( ) 006-B0498-1( )
20 to 999 006-C0093-21
SAE AS8019A
kts 006-C0094-21
TSO-C3d
006-C0079-21
ETSO-C3d
Turn and Slip 006-C0078-21
SAE AS8004 Type II 006-B1071-1( ) 006-B0498-1( )
Instrument 006-C0093-21
Incomplete System
006-C0094-21
[1]
TSO-C4c
Turn 006-C0079-21
ETSO-C4c
Bank and Pitch Error, 006-C0078-21
SAE AS8001 006-B1071-1( ) 006-B0498-1( )
Instruments Category 006-C0093-21
Incomplete System
A 006-C0094-21
[1]
TSO-C6d
006-C0079-21
ETSO-C6d
Direction (Heading) 006-C0078-21
SAE AS8013A 006-B1071-1( ) 006-B0498-1( )
Instrument, Magnetic 006-C0093-21
Incomplete System
006-C0094-21
[1]
Type C
006-C0079-21
Vertical Velocity TSO-C8d Range:
006-C0078-21
Instruments ETSO-C8d -9950 to 006-B1071-1( ) 006-B0498-1( )
006-C0093-21
(Rate-Of-Climb) SAE AS8016A 9950 ft/
006-C0094-21
min
006-C0079-21
Altimeter, Pressure TSO-C10b Range:
006-C0078-21
Actuated, Sensitive ETSO-C10b -1000 to 006-B1071-1( ) 006-B0498-1( )
006-C0093-21
Type SAE AS8009A 99,980 ft
006-C0094-21
ILS Glide Slope TSO-C34e
Receiving Equipment ETSO-2C34f 006-C0079-21
Operating Within The RTCA DO-192 006-C0078-21
006-B1071-1( ) 006-B0498-1( )
Radio Frequency EUROCAE ED-47B 006-C0093-21
Range of 328.6-335.4 Incomplete System 006-C0094-21
Megahertz (MHz) [1]
Airborne ILS Localizer TSO-C36e
Receiving Equipment ETSO-2C36f 006-C0079-21
Operating Within The RTCA DO-195 006-C0078-21
006-B1071-1( ) 006-B0498-1( )
Radio Frequency EUROCAE ED-46B 006-C0093-21
Range of 108-112 Incomplete System 006-C0094-21
Megahertz (MHz) [1]

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-14
 TSO/ETSO Applicable LRU Applicable LRU Applicable
Function SAE/RTCA/ Category SW P/Ns SW P/Ns Custom Logic
EUROCAE (GDU 620 G500) (GDU 620 G600) Device P/Ns
VOR Receiving
TSO-C40c
Equipment Operating 006-C0079-21
ETSO-2C40c
Within The Radio 006-C0078-21
RTCA DO-196 006-B1071-1( ) 006-B0498-1( )
Frequency Range Of 006-C0093-21
Incomplete System
108-117.95 Megahertz 006-C0094-21
[1]
(MHz)
TSO-C41d
006-C0079-21
Airborne Automatic ETSO-2C41d
006-C0078-21
Direction Finding RTCA DO-179 006-B1071-1( ) 006-B0498-1( )
006-C0093-21
Equipment (ADF) Incomplete System
006-C0094-21
[1]
TSO-C52b
006-C0079-21
ETSO-C52b
Flight Director 006-C0078-21
SAE AS8008 006-B1071-1( ) 006-B0498-1( )
Equipment 006-C0093-21
Incomplete System
006-C0094-21
[1]
TSO-C63c
ETSO-C63c 006-C0079-21
Airborne Weather and
RTCA DO-173 006-C0078-21
Ground Mapping 006-B1071-1( ) 006-B0498-1( )
EUROCAE ED-38 006-C0093-21
Pulsed Radar
Incomplete System 006-C0094-21
[1] [2] [5]
006-C0079-21
TSO-C113
Airborne Multipurpose 006-C0078-21
ETSO-C113 006-B1071-1( ) 006-B0498-1( )
Electronic Displays 006-C0093-21
SAE AS8034
006-C0094-21
TSO-C118
006-C0079-21
Traffic Alert and ETSO-C118
006-C0078-21
Collision Avoidance RTCA DO-197 006-B1071-1( ) 006-B0498-1( )
006-C0093-21
System (TCAS I) Incomplete System
006-C0094-21
[1]
TSO-C147
006-C0079-21
Traffic Advisory ETSO-C147
006-C0078-21
System (TAS) Airborne RTCA DO-197A Class 3 006-B1071-1( ) 006-B0498-1( )
006-C0093-21
Equipment Incomplete System
006-C0094-21
[1] [2]
006-C0079-21
TSO-C151b
Terrain Awareness and 006-C0078-21
ETSO-C151b B N/A 006-B0498-1( )
Warning System 006-C0093-21
[3]
006-C0094-21

Notes:
[1] The TSO/ETSO is for an incomplete system and requires the GDU 620 to be installed and
checked out according to this installation manual. The GDU must be interfaced to units
with applicable TSO/ETSO authorizations to be a complete TSO/ETSO system.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-15
 [2] The GDU 620 displays data for all classes of compatible interfaced TSO-C63c/ETSO-C63c
and TSO-C147/ETSO-C147 authorized equipment. The GDU 620 equipment class is identical
to that of the interfaced equipment.
[3] Applies only when TAWS is enabled in GDU 620.
[4] Not used.
[5] Applies only when Weather Radar is enabled in GDU 620.

Table 1-7 TSO/ETSO Compliance (SW v4.xx)

TSO/ETSO Applicable LRU Applicable LRU Applicable

Function SAE/RTCA/ Category SW P/Ns SW P/Ns Custom Logic
EUROCAE (GDU 620 G500) (GDU 620 G600) Device P/Ns
Type C 006-C0079-21
TSO-C2d
Range: 006-C0078-21
Airspeed Instruments ETSO-C2d 006-B1071-2( ) 006-B0498-2( )
20 to 999 006-C0093-21
SAE AS8019A
kts 006-C0094-21
TSO-C3d
006-C0079-21
Turn and Slip ETSO-C3d 006-C0078-21
SAE AS8004 Type II 006-B1071-2( ) 006-B0498-2( )
Instrument 006-C0093-21
Incomplete System 006-C0094-21
[1]
TSO-C4c
Turn 006-C0079-21
ETSO-C4c
Bank and Pitch Error, 006-C0078-21
SAE AS8001 006-B1071-2( ) 006-B0498-2( )
Instruments Category 006-C0093-21
Incomplete System
A 006-C0094-21
[1]
TSO-C6d
006-C0079-21
ETSO-C6d
Direction (Heading) 006-C0078-21
SAE AS8013A 006-B1071-2( ) 006-B0498-2( )
Instrument, Magnetic 006-C0093-21
Incomplete System
006-C0094-21
[1]
Type C
006-C0079-21
Vertical Velocity TSO-C8d Range:
006-C0078-21
Instruments ETSO-C8d -9950 to 006-B1071-2( ) 006-B0498-2( )
006-C0093-21
(Rate-Of-Climb) SAE AS8016A 9950 ft/
006-C0094-21
min
006-C0079-21
Altimeter, Pressure TSO-C10b Range:
006-C0078-21
Actuated, Sensitive ETSO-C10b -1000 to 006-B1071-2( ) 006-B0498-2( )
006-C0093-21
Type SAE AS8009A 99,980 ft
006-C0094-21
ILS Glide Slope TSO-C34e
Receiving Equipment ETSO-2C34f 006-C0079-21
Operating Within The RTCA DO-192 006-C0078-21
006-B1071-2( ) 006-B0498-2( )
Radio Frequency EUROCAE ED-47B 006-C0093-21
Range of 328.6-335.4 Incomplete System 006-C0094-21
Megahertz (MHz) [1]

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-16
 TSO/ETSO Applicable LRU Applicable LRU Applicable
Function SAE/RTCA/ Category SW P/Ns SW P/Ns Custom Logic
EUROCAE (GDU 620 G500) (GDU 620 G600) Device P/Ns
Airborne ILS Localizer TSO-C36e
Receiving Equipment ETSO-2C36f 006-C0079-21
Operating Within The RTCA DO-195 006-C0078-21
006-B1071-2( ) 006-B0498-2( )
Radio Frequency EUROCAE ED-46B 006-C0093-21
Range of 108-112 Incomplete System 006-C0094-21
Megahertz (MHz) [1]
VOR Receiving
TSO-C40c
Equipment Operating 006-C0079-21
ETSO-2C40c
Within The Radio 006-C0078-21
RTCA DO-196 006-B1071-2( ) 006-B0498-2( )
Frequency Range Of 006-C0093-21
Incomplete System
108-117.95 Megahertz 006-C0094-21
[1]
(MHz)
TSO-C41d
006-C0079-21
Airborne Automatic ETSO-2C41d
006-C0078-21
Direction Finding RTCA DO-179 006-B1071-2( ) 006-B0498-2( )
006-C0093-21
Equipment (ADF) Incomplete System
006-C0094-21
[1]
TSO-C52b
006-C0079-21
ETSO-C52b
Flight Director 006-C0078-21
SAE AS8008 006-B1071-2( ) 006-B0498-2( )
Equipment 006-C0093-21
Incomplete System
006-C0094-21
[1]
TSO-C63c
ETSO-C63c 006-C0079-21
Airborne Weather and
RTCA DO-173 006-C0078-21
Ground Mapping 006-B1071-2( ) 006-B0498-2( )
EUROCAE ED-38 006-C0093-21
Pulsed Radar
Incomplete System 006-C0094-21
[1] [2] [5]
TSO-C113 006-C0079-21
Airborne Multipurpose ETSO-C113 006-C0078-21
006-B1071-2( ) 006-B0498-2( )
Electronic Displays SAE AS8034 006-C0093-21
006-C0094-21
TSO-C118
006-C0079-21
Traffic Alert and ETSO-C118
006-C0078-21
Collision Avoidance RTCA DO-197 006-B1071-2( ) 006-B0498-2( )
006-C0093-21
System (TCAS I) Incomplete System
006-C0094-21
[1]
TSO-C147
006-C0079-21
Traffic Advisory ETSO-C147
006-C0078-21
System (TAS) Airborne RTCA DO-197A Class 3 006-B1071-2( ) 006-B0498-2( )
006-C0093-21
Equipment Incomplete System
006-C0094-21
[1] [2]
006-C0079-21
TSO-C151b
Terrain Awareness and 006-C0078-21
ETSO-C151b B N/A 006-B0498-2( )
Warning System 006-C0093-21
[3]
006-C0094-21

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-17
 Notes:
[1] The TSO/ETSO is for an incomplete system and requires the GDU 620 to be installed and
checked out according to this installation manual. The GDU must be interfaced to units
with applicable TSO/ETSO authorizations to be a complete TSO/ETSO system.
[2] The GDU 620 displays data for all classes of compatible interfaced TSO-C63c/ETSO-C63c
and TSO-C147/ETSO-C147 authorized equipment. The GDU 620 equipment class is identical
to that of the interfaced equipment.
[3] Applies only when TAWS is enabled in GDU 620.
[4] Not Used.
[5] Applies only when Weather Radar is enabled in GDU 620.
[6] Not Used.
Table 1-8 TSO/ETSO Compliance (SW v5.xx)

TSO/ETSO Applicable LRU Applicable LRU Applicable

Function SAE/RTCA/ Category SW P/Ns SW P/Ns Custom Logic
EUROCAE (GDU 620 G500) (GDU 620 G600) Device P/Ns
Type C 006-C0079-21
TSO-C2d
Range: 006-C0078-21
Airspeed Instruments ETSO-C2d 006-B1071-3( ) 006-B0498-3( )
20 to 999 006-C0093-21
SAE AS8019A
kts 006-C0094-21
TSO-C3d
006-C0079-21
ETSO-C3d
006-C0078-21
Turn and Slip Instrument SAE AS8004 Type II 006-B1071-3( ) 006-B0498-3( )
006-C0093-21
Incomplete System
006-C0094-21
[1]
TSO-C4c
Turn 006-C0079-21
ETSO-C4c
Bank and Pitch Error, 006-C0078-21
SAE AS8001 006-B1071-3( ) 006-B0498-3( )
Instruments Category 006-C0093-21
Incomplete System
A 006-C0094-21
[1]
TSO-C6d
006-C0079-21
ETSO-C6d
Direction (Heading) 006-C0078-21
SAE AS8013A 006-B1071-3( ) 006-B0498-3( )
Instrument, Magnetic 006-C0093-21
Incomplete System
006-C0094-21
[1]
Type C
006-C0079-21
Vertical Velocity TSO-C8d Range:
006-C0078-21
Instruments ETSO-C8d -9950 to 006-B1071-3( ) 006-B0498-3( )
006-C0093-21
(Rate-Of-Climb) SAE AS8016A 9950 ft/
006-C0094-21
min
006-C0079-21
TSO-C10b Range:
Altimeter, Pressure 006-C0078-21
ETSO-C10b -1000 to 006-B1071-3( ) 006-B0498-3( )
Actuated, Sensitive Type 006-C0093-21
SAE AS8009A 99,980 ft
006-C0094-21

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-18
 TSO/ETSO Applicable LRU Applicable LRU Applicable
Function SAE/RTCA/ Category SW P/Ns SW P/Ns Custom Logic
EUROCAE (GDU 620 G500) (GDU 620 G600) Device P/Ns
ILS Glide Slope TSO-C34e
Receiving Equipment ETSO-2C34f 006-C0079-21
Operating Within The RTCA DO-192 006-C0078-21
006-B1071-3( ) 006-B0498-3( )
Radio Frequency Range EUROCAE ED-47B 006-C0093-21
of 328.6-335.4 Incomplete System 006-C0094-21
Megahertz (MHz) [1]
Airborne ILS Localizer TSO-C36e
Receiving Equipment ETSO-2C36f 006-C0079-21
Operating Within The RTCA DO-195 006-C0078-21
006-B1071-3( ) 006-B0498-3( )
Radio Frequency Range EUROCAE ED-46B 006-C0093-21
of 108-112 Megahertz Incomplete System 006-C0094-21
(MHz) [1]
VOR Receiving
TSO-C40c
Equipment Operating 006-C0079-21
ETSO-2C40c
Within The Radio 006-C0078-21
RTCA DO-196 006-B1071-3( ) 006-B0498-3( )
Frequency Range Of 006-C0093-21
Incomplete System
108-117.95 Megahertz 006-C0094-21
[1]
(MHz)
TSO-C41d
006-C0079-21
Airborne Automatic ETSO-2C41d
006-C0078-21
Direction Finding RTCA DO-179 006-B1071-3( ) 006-B0498-3( )
006-C0093-21
Equipment (ADF) Incomplete System
006-C0094-21
[1]
TSO-C52b
006-C0079-21
ETSO-C52b
Flight Director 006-C0078-21
SAE AS8008 006-B1071-3( ) 006-B0498-3( )
Equipment 006-C0093-21
Incomplete System
006-C0094-21
[1]
TSO-C63c
ETSO-C63c 006-C0079-21
Airborne Weather and
RTCA DO-173 006-C0078-21
Ground Mapping Pulsed 006-B1071-3( ) 006-B0498-3( )
EUROCAE ED-38 006-C0093-21
Radar
Incomplete System 006-C0094-21
[1] [4]
TSO-C87
006-C0079-21
ETSO-2C87
006-C0078-21
Radar Altitude Display EUROCAE ED-30 006-B1071-3( ) 006-B0498-3( )
006-C0093-21
Incomplete System
006-C0094-21
[1]
006-C0079-21
TSO-C113
Airborne Multipurpose 006-C0078-21
ETSO-C113 006-B1071-3( ) 006-B0498-3( )
Electronic Displays 006-C0093-21
SAE AS8034
006-C0094-21

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-19
 TSO/ETSO Applicable LRU Applicable LRU Applicable
Function SAE/RTCA/ Category SW P/Ns SW P/Ns Custom Logic
EUROCAE (GDU 620 G500) (GDU 620 G600) Device P/Ns
TSO-C118
006-C0079-21
Traffic Alert and Collision ETSO-C118
006-C0078-21
Avoidance System RTCA DO-197 006-B1071-3( ) 006-B0498-3( )
006-C0093-21
(TCAS I) Incomplete System
006-C0094-21
[1]
TSO-C147
006-C0079-21
Traffic Advisory System ETSO-C147
006-C0078-21
(TAS) Airborne RTCA DO-197A Class B 006-B1071-3( ) 006-B0498-3( )
006-C0093-21
Equipment Incomplete System
006-C0094-21
[1]
006-C0079-21
TSO-C151b
Terrain Awareness and 006-C0078-21
ETSO-C151b Class B N/A 006-B0498-3( )
Warning System 006-C0093-21
[2]
006-C0094-21

Notes:
[1] The TSO/ETSO is for an incomplete system and requires the GDU 620 to be installed and
checked out according to this installation manual. The GDU 620 must be interfaced to
units with applicable TSO/ETSO authorizations to be a complete TSO/ETSO system. The
installer should verify that non-Garmin interfaced devices listed in this manual have been
authorized under appropriate TSO/ETSOs to assure the installed GDU 620 will comply
with the TSO/ETSO requirements.
[2] Applies only when TAWS is enabled in GDU 620.
[3] Not used.
[4] Applies only when Weather Radar is enabled in GDU 620.
[5] Not used.
Table 1-9 TSO/ETSO Compliance (SW v6.xx)
Applicable LRU Applicable LRU Applicable
TSO/ETSO/SAE/
Function Category SW P/Ns SW P/Ns Custom Logic
RTCA/EUROCAE
(GDU 620 G500) (GDU 620 G600) Device P/Ns
Type C 006-C0079-21
TSO-C2d
Range: 006-C0078-21
Airspeed Instruments ETSO-C2d 006-B1071-4() 006-B0498-4()
20 to 999 006-C0093-21
SAE AS8019A
kts 006-C0094-21
TSO-C3d
006-C0079-21
ETSO-C3d
Turn and Slip 006-C0078-21
SAE AS8004 Type II 006-B1071-4() 006-B0498-4()
Instrument 006-C0093-21
Incomplete System
006-C0094-21
[1]
TSO-C4c
Turn 006-C0079-21
ETSO-C4c
Bank and Pitch Error, 006-C0078-21
SAE AS8001 006-B1071-4() 006-B0498-4()
Instruments Category 006-C0093-21
Incomplete System
A 006-C0094-21
[1]

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-20
 Applicable LRU Applicable LRU Applicable
TSO/ETSO/SAE/
Function Category SW P/Ns SW P/Ns Custom Logic
RTCA/EUROCAE
(GDU 620 G500) (GDU 620 G600) Device P/Ns
TSO-C6d
006-C0079-21
ETSO-C6e
Direction (Heading) 006-C0078-21
SAE AS8013A 006-B1071-4() 006-B0498-4()
Instrument, Magnetic 006-C0093-21
Incomplete System
006-C0094-21
[1]
Type C
006-C0079-21
Vertical Velocity TSO-C8d Range:
006-C0078-21
Instruments ETSO-C8e -9950 to 006-B1071-4() 006-B0498-4()
006-C0093-21
(Rate-Of-Climb) SAE AS8016A 9950 ft/
006-C0094-21
min
006-C0079-21
Altimeter, Pressure TSO-C10b Range:
006-C0078-21
Actuated, Sensitive ETSO-C10b -1000 to 006-B1071-4() 006-B0498-4()
006-C0093-21
Type SAE AS8009A 99,980 ft
006-C0094-21
ILS Glide Slope TSO-C34e
Receiving Equipment ETSO-2C34f 006-C0079-21
Operating Within The RTCA DO-192 006-C0078-21
006-B1071-4() 006-B0498-4()
Radio Frequency EUROCAE ED-47B 006-C0093-21
Range of 328.6-335.4 Incomplete System 006-C0094-21
Megahertz (MHz) [1]
Airborne ILS Localizer TSO-C36e
Receiving Equipment ETSO-2C36f 006-C0079-21
Operating Within The RTCA DO-195 006-C0078-21
006-B1071-4() 006-B0498-4()
Radio Frequency EUROCAE ED-46B 006-C0093-21
Range of 108-112 Incomplete System 006-C0094-21
Megahertz (MHz) [1]
VOR Receiving
TSO-C40c
Equipment Operating 006-C0079-21
ETSO-2C40c
Within The Radio 006-C0078-21
RTCA DO-196 006-B1071-4() 006-B0498-4()
Frequency Range Of 006-C0093-21
Incomplete System
108-117.95 Megahertz 006-C0094-21
[1]
(MHz)
TSO-C41d
006-C0079-21
Airborne Automatic ETSO-2C41d
006-C0078-21
Direction Finding RTCA DO-179 006-B1071-4() 006-B0498-4()
006-C0093-21
Equipment (ADF) Incomplete System
006-C0094-21
[1]
TSO-C43c
006-C0079-21
ETSO-C43a
Temperature 006-C0078-21
SAE AS8005A 006-B1071-4() N/A
Instruments 006-C0093-21
Incomplete System
006-C0094-21
[1] [6]
TSO-C47a
006-C0079-21
ETSO-C47a
Fuel, Oil, Hydraulic 006-C0078-21
SAE AS408C 006-B1071-4() N/A
Pressure Instruments 006-C0093-21
Incomplete System
006-C0094-21
[1] [6]

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-21
 Applicable LRU Applicable LRU Applicable
TSO/ETSO/SAE/
Function Category SW P/Ns SW P/Ns Custom Logic
RTCA/EUROCAE
(GDU 620 G500) (GDU 620 G600) Device P/Ns
TSO-C49b
006-C0079-21
ETSO-C49b
Electric Tachometer: 006-C0078-21
SAE AS404C 006-B1071-4() N/A
Magnetic Drag 006-C0093-21
Incomplete System
006-C0094-21
[1] [6]
TSO-C52b
006-C0079-21
ETSO-C52b
Flight Director 006-C0078-21
SAE AS8008 006-B1071-4() 006-B0498-4()
Equipment 006-C0093-21
Incomplete System
006-C0094-21
[1]
006-C0079-21
TSO-C55a SAE
Fuel and Oil Quantity 006-C0078-21
AS405C Incomplete 006-B1071-4() N/A
Instruments 006-C0093-21
System [1] [6]
006-C0094-21
TSO-C63c
ETSO-C63c 006-C0079-21
Airborne Weather and
RTCA DO-173 006-C0078-21
Ground Mapping 006-B1071-4() 006-B0498-4()
EUROCAE ED-38 006-C0093-21
Pulsed Radar
Incomplete System 006-C0094-21
[1] [4]
TSO-C87
006-C0079-21
ETSO-2C87
006-C0078-21
Radar Altitude Display EUROCAE ED-30 006-B1071-4() 006-B0498-4()
006-C0093-21
Incomplete System
006-C0094-21
[1]
006-C0079-21
TSO-C113
Airborne Multipurpose 006-C0078-21
ETSO-C113 006-B1071-4() 006-B0498-4()
Electronic Displays 006-C0093-21
SAE AS8034
006-C0094-21
TSO-C118
006-C0079-21
Traffic Alert and ETSO-C118
006-C0078-21
Collision Avoidance RTCA DO-197 006-B1071-4() 006-B0498-4()
006-C0093-21
System (TCAS I) Incomplete System
006-C0094-21
[1]
TSO-C147
006-C0079-21
Traffic Advisory ETSO-C147
006-C0078-21
System (TAS) Airborne RTCA DO-197A Class B 006-B1071-4() 006-B0498-4()
006-C0093-21
Equipment Incomplete System
006-C0094-21
[1]
006-C0079-21
TSO-C151b
Terrain Awareness and 006-C0078-21
ETSO-C151b Class B N/A 006-B0498-4()
Warning System 006-C0093-21
[2]
006-C0094-21

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-22
 Notes:
[1] The TSO/ETSO is for an incomplete system and requires the GDU 620 to be installed and
checked out according to this installation manual. The GDU 620 must be interfaced to
units with applicable TSO/ETSO authorizations to be a complete TSO/ETSO system. The
installer should verify that non-Garmin interfaced devices listed in this manual have been
authorized under appropriate TSO/ETSOs to assure the installed GDU 620 will comply
with the TSO/ETSO requirements.
[2] Applies only when TAWS is enabled in GDU 620.
[3] Not used.
[4] Applies only when Weather Radar is enabled in GDU 620.
[5] Not used.
[6] Applies only when EIS is enabled in GDU 620.

Table 1-10 TSO/ETSO Compliance (SW v7.xx)

Applicable
Applicable LRU Applicable LRU
TSO/ETSO/SAE/ Custom
Function Category SW P/Ns SW P/Ns
RTCA/EUROCAE Logic Device
(GDU 620 G500) (GDU 620 G600)
P/Ns
006-C0079-21
TSO-C2d Type C
006-C0078-21
Airspeed Instruments ETSO-C2d Range: 20 006-B1071-5( ) 006-B0498-5( )
006-C0093-21
SAE AS8019A to 999 kts
006-C0094-21
TSO-C3d 006-C0079-21
ETSO-C3d 006-C0078-21
Turn and Slip Instrument Type II 006-B1071-5( ) 006-B0498-5( )
SAE AS8004 006-C0093-21
Incomplete System [1] 006-C0094-21

TSO-C4c
006-C0079-21
ETSO-C4c Turn Error,
Bank and Pitch Instruments 006-B1071-5( ) 006-B0498-5( ) 006-C0078-21
SAE AS8001 Category A
006-C0093-21
Incomplete System [1]
006-C0094-21
TSO-C6e 006-C0079-21
Direction (Heading) ETSO-C6e 006-C0078-21
006-B1071-5( ) 006-B0498-5( )
Instrument, Magnetic SAE AS8013A 006-C0093-21
Incomplete System [1] 006-C0094-21
Type C 006-C0079-21
TSO-C8e
Vertical Velocity Instruments Range: 006-C0078-21
ETSO-C8e 006-B1071-5( ) 006-B0498-5( )
(Rate-Of-Climb) -9950 to 006-C0093-21
SAE AS8016A
9950 ft/min 006-C0094-21
006-C0079-21
TSO-C10b Range:
Altimeter, Pressure 006-C0078-21
ETSO-C10b -1000 to 006-B1071-5( ) 006-B0498-5( )
Actuated, Sensitive Type 006-C0093-21
SAE AS8009A 99,980 ft
006-C0094-21

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-23
 Applicable
Applicable LRU Applicable LRU
TSO/ETSO/SAE/ Custom
Function Category SW P/Ns SW P/Ns
RTCA/EUROCAE Logic Device
(GDU 620 G500) (GDU 620 G600)
P/Ns
ILS Glide Slope Receiving TSO-C34e
006-C0079-21
Equipment Operating Within ETSO-2C34f
006-C0078-21
The Radio Frequency RTCA DO-192 006-B1071-5( ) 006-B0498-5( )
006-C0093-21
Range of 328.6-335.4 EUROCAE ED-47B
Megahertz (MHz) 006-C0094-21
Incomplete System [1]

Airborne ILS Localizer TSO-C36e

006-C0079-21
Receiving Equipment ETSO-2C36f
006-C0078-21
Operating Within The Radio RTCA DO-195 006-B1071-5( ) 006-B0498-5( )
006-C0093-21
Frequency Range of 108- EUROCAE ED-46B
112 Megahertz (MHz) 006-C0094-21
Incomplete System [1]

VOR Receiving Equipment TSO-C40c 006-C0079-21

Operating Within The Radio ETSO-2C40c 006-C0078-21
006-B1071-5( ) 006-B0498-5( )
Frequency Range Of 108- RTCA DO-196 006-C0093-21
117.95 Megahertz (MHz) Incomplete System [1] 006-C0094-21
TSO-C41d 006-C0079-21
Airborne Automatic
ETSO-2C41d 006-C0078-21
Direction Finding Equipment 006-B1071-5( ) 006-B0498-5( )
RTCA DO-179 006-C0093-21
(ADF)
Incomplete System [1] 006-C0094-21
TSO-C43c
006-C0079-21
ETSO-C43c
006-C0078-21
Temperature Instruments SAE AS8005A 006-B1071-5( ) N/A
006-C0093-21
Incomplete System [1]
006-C0094-21
[6]
TSO-C47a
006-C0079-21
ETSO-C47a
Fuel, Oil, Hydraulic 006-C0078-21
SAE AS408C 006-B1071-5( ) N/A
Pressure Instruments 006-C0093-21
Incomplete System [1]
006-C0094-21
[6]
TSO-C49b
006-C0079-21
ETSO-C49b
Electric Tachometer: 006-C0078-21
SAE AS404C 006-B1071-5( ) N/A
Magnetic Drag 006-C0093-21
Incomplete System [1]
006-C0094-21
[6]
TSO-C52b 006-C0079-21
ETSO-C52b 006-C0078-21
Flight Director Equipment 006-B1071-5( ) 006-B0498-5( )
SAE AS8008 006-C0093-21
Incomplete System [1] 006-C0094-21
TSO-C55a 006-C0079-21
Fuel and Oil Quantity SAE AS405C 006-C0078-21
006-B1071-5( ) N/A
Instruments Incomplete System [1] 006-C0093-21
[6] 006-C0094-21

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-24
 Applicable
Applicable LRU Applicable LRU
TSO/ETSO/SAE/ Custom
Function Category SW P/Ns SW P/Ns
RTCA/EUROCAE Logic Device
(GDU 620 G500) (GDU 620 G600)
P/Ns
TSO-C63c
ETSO-2C63c 006-C0079-21
Airborne Weather and
RTCA DO-173 006-C0078-21
Ground Mapping Pulsed 006-B1071-5( ) 006-B0498-5( )
EUROCAE ED-38 006-C0093-21
Radar
Incomplete System [1] 006-C0094-21
[4]
TSO-C87 006-C0079-21
ETSO-2C87 006-C0078-21
Radar Altitude Display 006-B1071-5( ) 006-B0498-5( )
EUROCAE ED-30 006-C0093-21
Incomplete System [1] 006-C0094-21
TSO-C110a 006-C0079-21
Airborne Passive
ETSO-C110a 006-C0078-21
Thunderstorm Detection 006-B1071-5( ) 006-B0498-5( )
RTCA DO-191 006-C0093-21
Equipment
Incomplete System [1] 006-C0094-21
006-C0079-21
TSO-C113
Airborne Multipurpose 006-C0078-21
ETSO-C113 006-B1071-5( ) 006-B0498-5( )
Electronic Displays 006-C0093-21
SAE AS8034
006-C0094-21
TSO-C118 006-C0079-21
Traffic Alert and Collision ETSO-C118 006-C0078-21
006-B1071-5( ) 006-B0498-5( )
Avoidance System (TCAS I) RTCA DO-197 006-C0093-21
Incomplete System [1] 006-C0094-21
TSO-C147 006-C0079-21
Traffic Advisory System ETSO-C147 006-C0078-21
Class B 006-B1071-5( ) 006-B0498-5( )
(TAS) Airborne Equipment RTCA DO-197A 006-C0093-21
Incomplete System [1] 006-C0094-21
006-C0079-21
TSO-C151c
Terrain Awareness and 006-C0078-21
ETSO-C151b Class B 006-B1071-5( ) [7] 006-B0498-5( )
Warning System (TAWS) 006-C0093-21
[2]
006-C0094-21
006-C0079-21
TSO-C157a
Flight Information Services - 006-C0078-21
RTCA DO-267A Class 1, 2 006-B1071-5( ) 006-B0498-5( )
broadcast (FIS-B) 006-C0093-21
Incomplete System [1]
006-C0094-21
TSO-C165a
006-C0079-21
ETSO-C165
006-C0078-21
Moving Map RTCA DO-257A 006-B1071-5( ) 006-B0498-5( )
006-C0093-21
Incomplete System [1]
006-C0094-21
[8]
TSO-C194 006-C0079-21
Helicopter Terrain
ETSO-C194 006-C0078-21
Awareness and Warning 006-B1071-5( ) 006-B0498-5( )
RTCA DO-309 006-C0093-21
System (HTAWS)
Incomplete System [1] 006-C0094-21

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-25
 Applicable
Applicable LRU Applicable LRU
TSO/ETSO/SAE/ Custom
Function Category SW P/Ns SW P/Ns
RTCA/EUROCAE Logic Device
(GDU 620 G500) (GDU 620 G600)
P/Ns
006-C0079-21
Automatic Dependent TSO-C195a
Class B1, 006-C0078-21
Surveillance - Broadcast RTCA DO-317A 006-B1071-5( ) 006-B0498-5( )
B2, B3, B5 006-C0093-21
(ADS-B) Incomplete System [1]
006-C0094-21

Notes:
[1] The TSO/ETSO is for an incomplete system and requires the GDU 620 to be installed and
checked out according to this installation manual. The GDU 620 must be interfaced to
units with applicable TSO/ETSO authorizations to be a complete TSO/ETSO system. The
installer should verify that non-Garmin interfacing devices listed in this manual are
authorized, under appropriate TSO/ETSOs, to assure the installed GDU 620 will comply
with the TSO/ETSO requirements.
[2] Applies only when TAWS is enabled in GDU 620.
[3] Not used.
[4] Applies only when Weather Radar is enabled in GDU 620.
[5] Not used.
[6] Applies only when EIS is enabled in GDU 620.
[7] G500 function is display only and requires an external TAWS source.
[8] To meet the accuracy requirements of TSO-C165a, it is recommended that the GPS source
have the ability to compensate for installation-dependent GPS antenna offset, or the GPS
antenna should be located within 42.5 feet (13 meters) of the nose of the aircraft.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-26
 Table 1-11 Software Design Assurance
RTCA/DO-178B RTCA/DO-178B
Functionality Level Level
GDU 620 G500 GDU 620 G600
Operating System B [2] B
PFD display of Flight Director Bars C B
PFD display of CDI and VDI information C B
PFD display of GPS data and level of service C B
information
PFD display of VOR/ILS/LOC/GS, TAWS alerts (G600
only), baro altitude, slip-skid, rate-of-turn, radio altitude,
heading, track, air speed, vertical speed, ground speed, C B
ADF bearing pointer, track information, DME, marker
beacons, and outside air temperature
PFD Display of Attitude B B
PFD Timer and Altitude Selection B B
PFD Display of Control of Autopilot Modes C B
MFD Display of Iridium Phone and Weather Radar C C
Input processing of VOR/ILS/LOC/GS data C C
MFD Display of moving map, TAWS data, terrain, flight
plan overlay, charts, supplement waypoint and airport C C
information, ADS-B Traffic, HTAWS
Display of other information – TAS/TIS Traffic, XM
weather data, XM audio entertainment, time, FIS-B D D
weather, and Stormscope
Video Input and Display C C
EIS Display [1] B n/a

Notes:
[1] EIS Display for software v6.01 is level C.
[2] The operating system software changed from level C to level B as part of software v6.01. For
instructions to update the TSO label on G500 and G500H units refer to SB 1158.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-27
Complex Electronic Hardware Design Assurance Levels
The GDU 620 in both the G500 and G600 systems complies with RTCA/DO-254 Level B.

Table 1-12 TSO/ETSO Deviations

TSO Deviation
TSO-C2d 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-178B minimum software
level C instead of RTCA DO-178A software level 2 to demonstrate compliance for the
verification and validation of the computer software.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use SAE AS 8019A instead of SAE AS 8019
as the standard for Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for Airborne Equipment.
3. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-160D instead of RTCA DO-
160B as the standard for Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for Airborne
Equipment.
4. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to eliminate the requirement 3.2.3 in SAE AS
8019A that requires “the instrument face to be marked with ‘Airspeed’ or ‘IAS’ and also with
the applicable units of measure.” The GDU 620 includes a primary flight display and is not
dedicated to Airspeed indicator.
ETSO-C2d 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from the ETSO to use SAE AS 8019A instead of SAE AS
8019 as the Minimum Performance Standard.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from the ETSO to eliminate the requirement 3.2.3 in SAE AS
8019A that requires “the instrument face to be marked with 'Airspeed' or 'IAS' and also with
the applicable units of measure.”
TSO-C3d 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-160D instead of RTCA DO-
160B as the standard for Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for Airborne
Equipment.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-178B minimum software
level C instead of RTCA DO-178A software level 2 to demonstrate compliance for the
verification and validation of the computer software.
TSO-C4c 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use SAE AS 8001 instead of SAE AS 396B
for Minimum Performance Standards and Environmental Standards.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from SAE Aerospace Standard AS 8001 to use RTCA DO-
160D instead of RTCA DO-138 as the standard for Environmental Conditions and Test
Procedures for Airborne Equipment.
ETSO-C4c 1. Garmin was granted a devision from the ETSO to use SAE AS 8001 instead of SAE AS 396B
for Minimum Performance Standards and Environmental Standards.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from SAE Aerospace Standard AS 8001 to use RTCA DO-
160D instead of RTCA DO-138 as the standard for Environmental Conditions and Test
Procedures for Airborne Equipment.
TSO-C6e 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-160D Change 3 instead of
later versions of RTCA DO-160 as the standard for Environmental Conditions and Test
Procedures for Airborne Equipment.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO section 7.b for providing one copy of the data
in paragraphs 5.k through 5.n, if the unit performs functions beyond those described in
paragraph 3.a of this TSO.
3. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO for marking the TSO number, Software Part
Number, Date of Manufacture and “Dev. See IM” on the exterior of the unit.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-28
 TSO Deviation
TSO-C8e 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-160D Change 3 instead of
later versions of RTCA DO-160 as the standard for Environmental Conditions and Test
Procedures for Airborne Equipment.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO section 7.b for providing one copy of the data
in paragraphs 5.l through 5.n if the unit performs functions beyond those described in
paragraph 3.a of this TSO.
3. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO for marking the TSO number, Software Part
Number, Date of Manufacture and “Dev. See IM” on the exterior of the unit.
TSO-C10b 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use SAE AS 8009A instead of SAE AS 392c
as the Minimum Performance Standard.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-160D instead of RTCA
DO160B as the standard for Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for Airborne
Equipment.
3. Garmin was granted a deviation from SAE AS 8009A Section 3.11 to not display ALTITUDE
or ALT next to the tape indicating altitude. The GDU 620 presents a scrolling altitude tape with
digital readout in a standardized format and location directly to the right of the attitude
indication on the primary flight display.
ETSO-C10b 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from the ETSO to use SAE AS 8009A instead of SAE AS
392C as the Minimum Performance Standard.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from SAE AS 8009A Section 3.11 to not display ALTITUDE
or ALT next to the tape indicating altitude.
3. Garmin was granted a deviation from SAE AS 8009A Section 3.7 that requires the indicating
means to be visible from all points on a surface defined as making an angle of 30 degrees
with the perpendicular.
TSO-C34e 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-160D instead of RTCA DO-
160B as the standard for Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for Airborne
Equipment.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-178B minimum software
level C instead of RTCA DO-178A software level 2 to demonstrate compliance for the
verification and validation of the computer software.
TSO-C36e 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-160D instead of RTCA DO-
160B as the standard for Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for Airborne
Equipment.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-178B minimum software
level C instead of RTCA DO-178A software level 2 to demonstrate compliance for the
verification and validation of the computer software.
TSO-C40c 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-178B minimum software
level C instead of RTCA DO-178A software level 2 to demonstrate compliance for the
verification and validation of the computer software.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-160D instead of RTCA DO-
160B as the standard for Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for Airborne
Equipment.
TSO-C41d 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-160D instead of RTCA DO-
160B as the standard for Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for Airborne
Equipment.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-178B instead of RTCA DO-
178 to demonstrate compliance for the verification and validation of the computer software.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-29
 TSO Deviation
TSO-C43c 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-160D instead of DO-160C as
the standard for Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for Airborne Equipment.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to us SAE AS8005A instead of SAE AS8005
as the Minimum Performance Standard.
3. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO paragraph b, which requires marking
equipment with Software Part Number and TSO number.
4. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO, section b., to not mark rating and classification
of equipment accuracy on the outside of the unit.
ETSO-C43c 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from the ETSO to use SAE AS8005A instead of SAE
AS8005 as the Minimum Performance Standard.
TSO-C47a 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-160D instead of AS 408C as
the standard for Environmental Qualification.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO section 4.c to not display the software part
number on the outside of the unit.
3. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO, paragraph 4.d not to mark equipment with
deviations.
4. Garmin was granted a deviation from SAE AS408 Rev C paragraph 3.2, for marking the
instrument with explosion category.
5. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO and SAE AS408 Rev C paragraph 4.1.4 to
display the units of measure approximately the same size as the numerals and title.
6. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO section 4.a and AS408C section 3.2 to not
mark “Fire Resistant” or “Fireproof”, and range and rating on the outside of the unit.
7. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO and SAE AS408C section 4.1.5 to have a
viewing envelope of 45 degrees in both horizontal directions, 30 degrees in the up vertical
direction, and 10 degrees in the down vertical direction.
ETSO-C47a 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from SAE AS408C section 4.1.4 to display the units of
measure approximately the same size as the numerals and title.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from the ETSO Section 4.2 and SAE AS408C section 3.2, for
marking the instrument with explosion category and “Fire Resistant” or “Fireproof.”
3. Garmin was granted a deviation from the ETSO and SAE AS408C section 4.1.5 that requires
the indicating means to be visible from all points on a surface defined as making an angle of
30 degrees with the perpendicular.
4. Garmin was granted a deviation from the ETSO to use RTCA DO-160D instead of AS408C
as the environmental standard.
TSO-C49b 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use SAE AS404C instead of SAE AS404B
for Minimum Performance Standards and Environmental Standards.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO, paragraph b to not display the software part
number on the outside of the unit.
3. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO, SAE AS404C section 4.1.1.
4. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO, SAE AS404C section 4.1.3.2.
5. Garmin was granted a deviation to use DO-160D instead of SAE AS407B as the standard for
Environmental Qualification.
6. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO, section b., to not mark range and electrical
rating on the outside of the unit.
7. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO and SAE AS404C section 4.1.2 to have a
viewing envelope of 45 degrees in both horizontal directions, 30 degrees in the up vertical
direction, and 10 degrees in the down vertical direction.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-30
 TSO Deviation
ETSO-C49b 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from the ETSO to use SAE AS404C instead of SAE AS404B
as the Minimum Performance Standard.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from SAE AS404C section 4.1.1, which states, “Engine
speed shall be indicated by means of one or more moving pointers or dials. Relative moment
of the pointer with respect to the dial shall be clockwise for increasing RPM.”
3. Garmin was granted a deviation from SAE AS404C section 4.1.3.2, which states, “All
graduations shall be multiples of 10 RPM. The increment between graduations shall not
exceed 2-1/2% of full scale, above 600 RPM.”
4. Garmin was granted a deviation from the ETSO section 4.1 to not mark range and electrical
rating on the outside of the unit.
5. Garmin was granted a deviation from SAE AS404C section 4.1.2 that requires the indicating
means to be visible from all points on a surface defined as making an angle of 30 degrees
with the perpendicular.
6. Garmin was granted a deviation from the ETSO to use RTCA DO-160D instead of AS 404C
as the environmental standard.
TSO-C52b 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-160D instead of RTCA DO-
160C as the standard for Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for Airborne
Equipment.
TSO-C55a 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from SAE AS405C, paragraph 4.2.2 and 4.2.3.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO, paragraph 4 and SAE AS405C, section 3.2, to
not mark the outside of the unit with Type/Accuracy, Rating, Fluids, TSO number, and
Incomplete.
3. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-160D instead of SAE AS
405C as the standard for Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for Airborne
Equipment.
4. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO paragraph 4.a.1 and AS405C Section 3.2 to
mark the unit with name and range.
5. Garmin was granted a deviation from SAE AS405C paragraph 4.2.4 to allow “FUEL” to be
used to abbreviate “Fuel Quantity”.
6. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO paragraph 4.a.2 to allow the unit to be
permanently and legibly marked with a serial number and not the date of manufacture.
7. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO section 4.d to not display the software part
number on the outside of the unit.
8. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO, paragraph 4.e requirement to mark
“Deviation. See installation/instructions manual (IM).”
9. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO and SAE AS405C section 4.2.5 to have a
viewing envelope of 45 degrees in both horizontal directions, 30 degrees in the up vertical
direction, and 10 degrees in the down vertical direction.
TSO-C63c 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-178B minimum software
level C instead of RTCA DO-178 to demonstrate compliance for the verification and validation
of the computer software.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-160D instead of RTCA DO-
160A as the standard for Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for Airborne
Equipment.
3. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to include environmental categories in the
installation manual rather than marking on the unit.
4. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to refer to the installation manual for
equipment class marking.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-31
 TSO Deviation
TSO-C87 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO markings paragraph (b)(1) to not display the
environmental categories on the outside of the appliance.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use EUROCAE/ED-30 “Minimum
Performance Specification for Airborne Low-Range Radio (Radar) Altimeter Equipment” in
lieu of the Minimum Performance Standards for Airborne Low-Range Radio Altimeters,
contained within TSO-C87.
TSO-C110a 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-178B instead of earlier
versions of RTCA DO-178A to demonstrate compliance for the verification and validation of
the computer software.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-160D Change 3 instead of
later versions of RTCA DO-160 as the standard for Environmental Conditions and Test
Procedures for Airborne Equipment.
3. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO for marking the TSO number, Software Part
Number, Date of Manufacture and “Dev. See IM” on the exterior of the unit.
TSO-C113 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-178B minimum software
level C instead of RTCA DO-178A software level 2 to demonstrate compliance for the
verification and validation of the computer software.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-160D instead of RTCA DO-
160B as the standard for Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for Airborne
Equipment.
TSO-C118 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-160D instead of RTCA DO-
160B as the standard for Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for Airborne
Equipment
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-178B minimum software
level C instead of RTCA DO-178A software level 2 to demonstrate compliance for the
verification and validation of the computer software.
TSO-C147 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to refer to the installation manual for
equipment class marking.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-178B minimum software
level C instead of RTCA DO-178A software level 2 to demonstrate compliance for the
verification and validation of the computer software.
TSO-C151c 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO for marking the TSO number, Software Part
Number, Date of Manufacture and “Dev. See IM” on the exterior of the unit.
TSO-C157a 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from RTCA DO-267A sections 2.2.7, 3.8.1b, and 3.8.1.2 to
not include an indication of the product age for individual reports of XM AIRMETs, XM
SIGMETs, XM City Forecasts, XM County Warnings, XM Cell Movement, and XM TFRs.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from RTCA DO-267A sections 2.2.7, 3.8.1b, and 3.8.1.2 to
not include an indication of the product age on the weather map for XM Icing Potential, XM
Winds Aloft, and XM Turbulence.
3. Garmin was granted a deviation from RTCA DO-267A sections 2.2.8 and 3.8.1.2.1b to not
display the valid time for XM Freezing Level and XM Canada Winds Aloft.
4. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO for marking the TSO number, Software Part
Number, Date of Manufacture and “Dev. See IM” on the exterior of the unit.
TSO-C165a 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO for marking the TSO number, Software Part
Number, Date of Manufacture and “Dev. See IM” on the exterior of the unit.
TSO-C194 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-160D Change 3 instead of
later versions of RTCA DO-160 as the standard for Environmental Conditions and Test
Procedures for Airborne Equipment.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO for marking the TSO number, Software Part
Number, Date of Manufacture and “Dev. See IM” on the exterior of the unit.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-32
 TSO Deviation
TSO-C195a 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-160D Change 3 instead of
later versions of RTCA DO-160 as the standard for Environmental Conditions and Test
Procedures for Airborne Equipment.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO section 3.a that requires databases used to
support moving maps integrated with the SURF application must meet at east 5 meter
accuracy and 1 meter resolution.
3. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO for marking the TSO number, Software Part
Number, Date of Manufacture and “Dev. See IM” on the exterior of the unit.

The following are declared non-TSO functions and these non-TSO functions as defined in this manual
have been evaluated with the TSO functions. The design data for these non-TSO functions has been
accepted by the FAA when these non-TSO functions are installed in accordance with the guidance and
limitations provided in this manual.

Table 1-13 Non-TSO Functions

Applicable Applicable
Applicable
Design LRU SW P/Ns LRU SW P/Ns
Function Custom Logic
Assurance (GDU 620 (GDU 620
Device P/Ns
G500) G600)
Synthetic Vision Technology
The display of a computer-
generated image of the external
scene topography from the pilot’s
perspective. The image is derived
from aircraft attitude (or state), a
high-precision navigation solution,
and a database of terrain,
obstacles, and relevant cultural
features. RTCA/DO-178B
Synthetic Vision Technology Level B (G600)
provides additional awareness of RTCA/DO-178B 006-B1071-10 006-B0498-10
006-C0078-21
the aircraft position with respect to Level C through through
006-C0079-21
terrain. (G500/G500H) 006-C0093-21
006-B1071-5( ) 006-B0498-5( )
006-C0094-21
Synthetic Vision Technology RTCA/DO-254
consists of depictions of terrain, Level B
traffic, obstacles, and the
predicted position of the aircraft.
The performance requirements for
the Synthetic Vision Technology
function are based on FAA
Advisory Circular 23-26,
“Synthetic Vision and Pathway
Depictions on the Primary Flight
Display.”

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-33
 Applicable Applicable
Applicable
Design LRU SW P/Ns LRU SW P/Ns
Function Custom Logic
Assurance (GDU 620 (GDU 620
Device P/Ns
G500) G600)
Display of Auxiliary Video RTCA/DO-178B
Information Level C (G600)
General surveillance provided RTCA/DO-178B 006-C0078-21
and/or allowed for visual 006-B1071-20 006-B0498-20
Level C 006-C0079-21
monitoring of the inside or outside through through
(G500/G500H) 006-C0093-21
of the airplane. 006-B1071-5( ) 006-B0498-5( )
006-C0094-21
The display is pilot-selectable on RTCA/DO-254
the MFD. Level B

RTCA/DO-178B
Level D (G600)
XM Satellite Radio Audio
RTCA/DO-178B 006-C0078-21
Entertainment 006-B1071-10 006-B0498-04
Level D 006-C0079-21
Displays channel information and through through
(G500/G500H) 006-C0093-21
control audio output from Garmin 006-B1071-5( ) 006-B0498-5( )
006-C0094-21
GDL 69 Series.
RTCA/DO-254
Level B

RTCA/DO-178B
Level D (G600)
RTCA/DO-178B 006-C0078-21
Traffic Display/Control (TIS) 006-B1071-10 006-B0498-04
Level D 006-C0079-21
Requests and displays traffic data through through
(G500/G500H) 006-C0093-21
from GTX Mode S Transponder. 006-B1071-5( ) 006-B0498-5( )
006-C0094-21
RTCA/DO-254
Level B

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 1-34
2 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW
2.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Installation Materials ........................................................................................................................2-2
2.2.1 Configurations Available ...........................................................................................................2-2
2.2.2 Optional Accessories..................................................................................................................2-3
2.2.3 Optional Features .......................................................................................................................2-3
2.2.4 Materials Required But Not Supplied ........................................................................................2-5
2.3 Database Options ..............................................................................................................................2-6
2.4 Reference Material............................................................................................................................2-7
2.5 Installation Considerations ...............................................................................................................2-8
2.5.1 Cabling and Wiring ....................................................................................................................2-8
2.5.2 Cooling Requirements................................................................................................................2-8
2.5.3 Mounting Requirements .............................................................................................................2-8
2.5.4 Compass Safe Distance ..............................................................................................................2-8

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 2-1
2.1 Introduction
This section provides hardware equipment information for installing the GDU 620 and related hardware.
Installation of the GDU 620 should follow the aircraft TC or STC requirements. Cabling is fabricated by
the installing agency to fit each particular aircraft. Where applicable, the guidance of FAA advisory
circulars AC 43.13-1B and AC 43.13-2B may be useful for making retro-fit installations compliant with
FAA regulations.
2.2 Installation Materials
2.2.1 Configurations Available
The GDU 620 is available in various configurations under the following part numbers. Catalog part
numbers are shown with and without the installation kit.

Table 2-1 Catalog Part Numbers

Catalog P/N
PFD Without
Model Usage Bezel Color Unit P/N
Location Installation
Kit
GDU 620 G600 LH Black 011-01264-00 010-00482-00
GDU 620 G600 LH Gray [1] 011-01264-10 010-00482-10
GDU 620 G600 RH Black 011-01264-20 010-00482-20
GDU 620 G600 RH Gray [1] 011-01264-30 010-00482-30
GDU 620 G500 [2] LH Black 011-01264-50 010-00482-50
GDU 620 G500 [2] RH Black 011-01264-60 010-00482-60

[1] Contact factory for availability.

[2] G500 models can be converted to G500H models using a suitable unlock card. Refer to
section 2.2.3 for details.

Table 2-2 Installation Accessories

Item Usage Garmin P/N

GDU 620 Connector Kit [2] G500/G600 011-01656-00
Trim Plate, (0.032") [1] G500/G600 115-01009-00
Trim Plate, (0.063") [1] G500/G600 115-01009-10
GDU 620 Mounting Screw Kit G500/G600 011-02078-00 [3]

[1] Trim Plate is not painted. It must be cut to size and painted to match the installation.
[2] Configuration Module P/N 011-00979-02 is included GDU 620 connector kit,
P/N 011-01656-00.
[3] Mounting screw kit contains six screws P/N 211-64307-14.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 2-2
2.2.2 Optional Accessories

CAUTION
When a newer GMU 44 (P/N 011-00870-10 or -20) is installed, do not load older
software. Do not use G600 Loader Card (P/N 010-00771-00 through -13) or
downloadable software (P/N 006-B0942-00 through -13). Do not use G500 Software
(Loader Card PN 010-00841-10 or -11 or downloadable software (P/N 006-B1076-10 or -
11). The GMU 44 is not compatible with older software versions and damage may occur.

Each of the following optional accessories are provided separately from the GDU 620 unit.

Table 2-3 Accessories Provided Separately

Item Usage Garmin P/N

GDU 620 Cutout Template [1] G500/G600 115-01010-00
Installer Unlock Card G500/G600 010-00769-60
GDU 620 Main Loader Card G600 010-00771-( ) [2]
GDU 620 Main Loader Card G500 010-00841-( ) [2]
GDU 620 Main Loader Card G500H 010-00908-( ) [2]

[1] Cutout template is clamped to instrument panel and used to mark the cutout required by
the GDU 620. It is also used as a drill template to drill the holes for the six GDU 620
mounting screws. This template can be used to make multiple cutouts.
[2] Card dash number -( ) changes based upon software version.

2.2.3 Optional Features

The GDU 620 has optional features that can be enabled. Available features are listed below.

Table 2-4 Optional Features Available

Part
Item Usage
Number
GDU 6xx ChartView Enablement Card – Heavy Aircraft [1] G500/G600 010-00769-50
GDU 6xx ChartView Enablement Card – Light Aircraft [1] G500/G600 010-00769-53
GDU 6xx TAWS Enablement Card – Single GDU Installations [1] G600 010-00769-51
GDU 6xx Altitude Preselect Enablement Card [1] [2] G500/G600 010-00769-52
GDU 6xx TAWS Enablement Card – Dual GDU Installations [3] G600 010-00769-56
GDU 6xx Synthetic Vision Technology Enablement Card [1] [4] G500 only 010-00769-54
GDU 6xx Helicopter SVT Enablement Card [1] G500H only 010-00769-55
GDU 6xx GWX WXR Enablement Card [1] [4] [7] G500 010-00769-57
GDU 6xx Radar AGCS Enablement - Single GDU Installation [1] G500/G600 010-00769-93
GDU 6xx Radar AGCS Enablement - Dual GDU Installation [3] G500/G600 010-00769-94

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 2-3
 Part
Item Usage
Number
GDU 6xx Radar Turb Detect Enablement - Single GDU Installation [1] G500/G600 010-00769-95
GDU 6xx Radar Turb Detect Enablement - Dual GDU Installation [3] G500/G600 010-00769-96
GDU 6xx GAD 43 Enablement Card [1] [4] G500 010-00769-58
GDU 6xx Helicopter Enablement Card [1] [5] G500H only 010-00769-59
GDU 6xx Video Enablement Card [1] G500/G600 010-00769-61
GDU 6xx ARINC 708 WXR Enablement Card [1] G500/G600 010-00769-63
GDU 6xx Radio Altimeter Enablement Card – Single GDU Installations [1] G500/G600 010-00769-64
GDU 6xx Radio Altimeter Enablement Card – Dual GDU Installations [3] G500/G600 010-00769-65
GDU 6xx Metric Enablement Card [1] G500 010-00769-66
GDU 6xx RVSM Enablement Card [1] G500/G600 [6]
G500/
GDU 6xx DFCS 4 A429 Enablement Card [1] G500H/ 010-00769-62
G600
GDU 6xx Fast/Slow A429 Enablement Card - Single GDU Installation [1] G500/G600 010-00769-67
GDU 6xx Fast/Slow A429 Enablement Card - Dual GDU Installations [3] G500/G600 010-00769-68
GDU 6xx Helicopter EIS Enablement Card – Single GDU Installation [1] G500H only 010-00769-90
GDU 6xx Helicopter EIS Enablement Card – Dual GDU Installations [3] G500H only 010-00769-91
GDU 6xx Helicopter EIS Enablement Card – Triple GDU Installations [3] G500H only 010-00769-92
[1] An enablement card is required to enable the indicated feature. Each enablement card
can only be used once. Once used, the card will only work with that particular aircraft
installation.
[2] The Altitude Preselect option is only available for certain autopilots. Contact Garmin for
availability for a specific autopilot.
[3] An enablement card is required to enable the indicated feature. A single enablement card will
enable the functionality on both GDU 620s in a dual GDU installation. Once used, this card will
only work with that particular aircraft installation.
[4] This is a standard feature on the G600 and does not require an enablement card.
[5] This enablement card converts a G500 (left hand or right hand PFD version) into a G500H for
use in helicopters.
[6] RVSM enablement cards are only available for particular airframes. Contact Garmin for
availability.
[7] This enablement card can be used to enable the GWX 68/70/75 weather radar.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 2-4
2.2.4 Materials Required But Not Supplied
The GDU 620 is intended for use with the standard aviation accessories. The following items are required
for installation, but not supplied.
 Wire (MIL-W-22759/16 or equivalent)
 Shielded wire (MIL-C-27500 or equivalent)
 Aircraft grade category 5 Ethernet cable (only required for installations utilizing HSDB interfaces,
such as the GDL 69/69A, GWX 68/70/75, or dual GDU installations)
 Nut plates, reduced rivet spacing, #6 (six minimum – MS21071-06 or equivalent)
 Circuit breaker (5A for 28V installations, 7.5A for 14V installations)
 Tie wraps or lacing cord
 Ring terminals (for grounding)

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 2-5
2.3 Database Options

Table 2-5 Database Options (GDU SW v6.21 or Earlier)

Item Usage Part Number Note

Data Card, Terrain/Obstacle/Airports, SafeTaxi, FliteCharts G600 010-00769-42 [1]
Data Card, Terrain/Obstacle/Airports, SafeTaxi, FliteCharts G600 010-00769-43 [2]
G500
Data Card, Terrain/Obstacle/Airports, SafeTaxi, FliteCharts 010-00769-44
only
Data Card, Americas-North, Supplemental DBs (6AS Terrain) G500H 010-00769-4A [3]
Data Card, Americas-South, Supplemental DBs (6AS Terrain) G500H 010-00769-4B [3]
Data Card, Atlantic-North, Supplemental DBs (6AS Terrain) G500H 010-00769-4C [3]
Data Card, Atlantic-South, Supplemental DBs (6AS Terrain) G500H 010-00769-4D [3]
Data Card, Pacific-North, Supplemental DBs (6AS Terrain) G500H 010-00769-4E [3]
Data Card, Pacific-South, Supplemental DBs (6AS Terrain) G500H 010-00769-4F [3]
G500/
Data Card, Spare Database 010-01431-01 [4]
G600

[1] Used with GDU 620 software v2.xx.

[2] Used with GDU 620 software v3.00 through software v6.21.
[3] Only one data card is supplied with the unit. Data card region must be specified at time of
order.
[4] Replacement data card. Data must be loaded from flyGarmin.com.

Table 2-6 Database Options (GDU SW v7.00 or Later)

Item Usage Part Number Note

G500
Data Card, Terrain/Obstacle/Airports, SafeTaxi, FliteCharts only/ 010-00769-A1 [1]
G600
Data Card, Americas-North, Supplemental DBs (2.5AS Terrain) G500H 010-00769-AA
Data Card, Americas-South, Supplemental DBs (2.5AS Terrain) G500H 010-00769-AB
Data Card, Atlantic-North, Supplemental DBs (2.5AS Terrain) G500H 010-00769-AC
Data Card, Atlantic-South, Supplemental DBs (2.5AS Terrain) G500H 010-00769-AD
Data Card, Pacific-North, Supplemental DBs (2.5AS Terrain) G500H 010-00769-AE
Data Card, Pacific-South, Supplemental DBs (2.5AS Terrain) G500H 010-00769-AF
G500/
Data Card, Spare Database 010-01431-01 [2]
G600

[1] This card can be used in the G500H but it is recommended to use one of the G500H
specific cards.
[2] Replacement data card. Data must be loaded from flyGarmin.com.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 2-6
2.4 Reference Material

Table 2-7 Reference Material

Item Usage Part Number

GDU 620 Environmental Qualification Form G500/G600 005-00313-20
G500/G600 Pilot’s Guide G500/G600 190-00601-02
G500/G600 Cockpit Reference Guide G500/G600 190-00601-03
G500 Pilot’s Guide [1] G500 190-01102-02
G500 Cockpit Reference Guide [1] G500 190-01102-03
G500H Pilot’s Guide G500H 190-01150-02
G500H Cockpit Reference Guide G500H 190-01150-03
GDU 620 Maintenance Manual G500/G600 190-00601-10
GDL 69 Series TSO Installation Manual G500/G600 190-00355-07
GTS 8XX/GPA 65 Installation Manual G500/G600 190-00587-00

[1] This manual is obsolete as of software v7.00.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 2-7
2.5 Installation Considerations
The existing six-pack instruments must be removed, and the GDU 620 installed in the space vacated by the
removal of these instruments. The instrument panel must be cut out to accommodate the GDU 620 and six
fixed nut plates must be installed for fastening the GDU 620 to the instrument panel. An optional trim plate
may be installed for cosmetic reasons. A different trim plate can be used to provide support for the GDU
620 if the layout of the existing instruments does not provide adequate material for installing the nut plates
after the cutout for the GDU 620 is made. Cabling must be fabricated to fit each particular aircraft.
The following sections describe issues that must be considered for each installation.
2.5.1 Cabling and Wiring
Use AWG #24 or larger wire for all connections unless otherwise specified by the aircraft manufacturer or
Garmin. The standard-density socket contacts supplied in the connector kit are compatible with up to
AWG #20 wire (P6201 and P6202). The high-density pin contacts supplied in the connector kit are
compatible with up to AWG #22 wire (P6203). In cases where some installations have more than one unit
sharing a common circuit breaker, sizing and wire gauge is based on aircraft circuit breaker layout, length
of wiring, current draw of units, and internal unit protection characteristics. Do not attempt to combine
more than one unit on the same circuit breaker unless it is specified on aircraft manufacturer approved
drawings.
Ensure that routing of the wiring does not come in contact with sources of heat, RF or EMI interference.
Check that there is ample space for the cabling and mating connectors. Avoid sharp bends in cabling and
routing near aircraft control cables.
2.5.2 Cooling Requirements
The GDU 620 has two cooling fans integrated into the bottom of the chassis to supply forced-air cooling to
the unit. The mounting configuration should not restrict intake airflow into the fans at the bottom of the
display, or exhaust airflow from the ducts at the top of the display.
2.5.3 Mounting Requirements
The GDU 620 is designed to mount in the instrument panel, in place of the existing six-pack instruments.
The GDU 620 mounting hardware is designed to accommodate various sheet metal panel thicknesses,
from 0.063" to 0.125". Allow an additional two inches of clearance behind the mating connectors on rear
of the display for routing cables. Display details are shown in figure B-3.
2.5.4 Compass Safe Distance
After reconfiguring the avionics in the cockpit panel recalibrate the compass and make the necessary
changes for noting correction data.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 2-8
3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
3.1 Unpacking Unit.................................................................................................................................3-2
3.2 Special Tools Required.....................................................................................................................3-2
3.3 Equipment Mounting ........................................................................................................................3-2
3.3.1 Instrument Panel Cutout.............................................................................................................3-3
3.4 Unit Replacement .............................................................................................................................3-4
3.5 Cabling and Wiring...........................................................................................................................3-5
3.5.1 Wiring Harness...........................................................................................................................3-5
3.6 Backshell Assemblies .......................................................................................................................3-7
3.6.1 Backshell Assembly and D-Subminiature (D-sub) Connectors .................................................3-7
3.7 Unit Installation ..............................................................................................................................3-18
3.8 Continued Airworthiness ................................................................................................................3-18

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 3-1
3.1 Unpacking Unit
Carefully unpack the equipment and make a visual inspection of the unit for evidence of damage incurred
during shipment. If the unit is damaged, notify the carrier and file a claim. To justify a claim, save the
original shipping container and all packing materials. Do not return the unit to Garmin until the carrier has
authorized the claim.
Retain the original shipping containers for return shipments. If the original containers are not available, a
separate cardboard container should be prepared that is large enough to accommodate sufficient packing
material to prevent movement.
3.2 Special Tools Required
Crimp Tool
A crimp tool meeting MIL specification M22520/2-01 and a positioner/locator are required to ensure
consistent, reliable crimp contact connections for the rear D-sub connectors. Refer to table 3-2 for a list of
recommended crimp tools.
3.3 Equipment Mounting
When installing GDU 620 into a retrofit installation, the existing six-pack instruments must be removed
and the instrument panel cut to accommodate the GDU 620. Six fixed nut plates must be installed on the
instrument panel for fastening the GDU 620 to the instrument panel. An optional trim plate may be
installed for cosmetic reasons. A different trim plate can be used to provide support for the GDU 620 if the
layout of the existing instruments does not provide adequate material for installing the nut plates after the
cutout for the GDU 620 is made.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 3-2
3.3.1 Instrument Panel Cutout

NOTE
The GDU 620 mounting hole pattern is not symmetrical top to bottom or left to right. Care
must be taken to ensure that the template is oriented in the correct direction.

NOTE
The outside dimensions of the GDU 620 cutout pattern in the cutout template are identical
to the outside dimensions of the GDU 620.

NOTE
When positioning the template, ensure that the existing instrument panel material is
visible by the maximum number of mounting holes. This will permit the maximum number
of nut plates to be mounted in the instrument panel.

Remove all instruments required to facilitate the installation of the GDU 620. For the majority of
installations, the GDU 620 will be installed in place of the previously installed six-pack instruments.
1. Position the GDU 620 Cutout Template on the instrument panel at the desired location for the
GDU 620 and temporarily affix the Cutout Template in this location.
2. Using the template as a guide, drill six 0.1285" holes for the GDU 620 mounting points using a
#30 drill bit.
3. Transfer the GDU 620 LRU outline to the instrument panel, using the outside edges of the cutout
pattern.
4. Remove the template from the instrument panel. Fill in the gaps in the cutout markings on the
instrument panel using a straight edge.
5. Enlarge the six mounting holes to 0.144" using a #27 drill bit.
6. Cut out the GDU 620 outline on the instrument panel.
7. Install six #6 fixed nut plates, P/N MS21071-06, as shown in figure B-7.
8. If required, install the trim plate prior to installing the GDU 620.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 3-3
3.4 Unit Replacement

NOTE
The installation configuration settings are stored in the configuration module and will be
retained when the GDU 620 is replaced with a new unit. User settings are in internal LRU
flash memory and will be lost when the GDU 620 is replaced with a new unit.

When a GDU 620 is removed or installed verify:

1. The slide-lock engages on both sides of each connector.
2. The unit successfully completes the self-test sequence.
3. All databases are present.
4. Failure messages are not present.
If the unit is serviced or replaced verify:
1. The slide-lock engages on both sides of each connector.
2. The configuration is correct. Refer to a previously completed checkout log.
3. The unit successfully completes the self-test sequence.
4. Failure messages are not present.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 3-4
3.5 Cabling and Wiring
The GDU 620 connector kit includes connectors and crimp contacts. Make the crimp connections with a
crimp tool as specified in table 3-2.
 Refer to the interconnection diagrams in appendix C for the appropriate interconnections.
 Use 22 or 24 AWG wire for all connections except for power.
 Use 20 AWG for power/ground. Install the configuration module as described in section 3.6.1.2.
 Once the cable assemblies have been made, position the cable so that there is sufficient length to
allow the GDU to be removed from the instrument panel with the cables attached.
 Route the wiring bundle as appropriate.
 Avoid sharp bends.
3.5.1 Wiring Harness

CAUTION
Check wiring connections for errors before connecting the cables to the GDU 620.
Incorrect wiring could cause component damage.

Allow adequate space for installation of cables and connectors. The installer supplies and fabricates all of
the cables. All electrical connections are made through a 37-pin D-sub connector, a 50-pin
D-sub connector and a 62-pin D-sub connector provided by Garmin. Construct the wiring harness
according to the information contained in this and the following sections. Cable lengths will vary
depending upon installation.
1. Strip all wires going to the connectors 0.17 inches.
2. Insert the wire into the pin and crimp with one of the recommended (or equivalent) crimping tools.
3. Insert the pin into the connector housing location as specified by the interconnect drawings in
appendix C.
4. Verify the pin is properly engaged into the connector by gently tugging on the wire.
5. Route and secure the cable run from the GDU 620 to the other units away from sources of
electrical noise.
Section 4 provides I/O definition of all input and output signals. Required connectors and associated
hardware are supplied with the connector kit. Refer to appendix C for interconnect wiring diagrams.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 3-5
 Table 3-1 Socket Contact Part Numbers
37-pin connector
Configuration Module 62-pin
(P6201)
50-pin connector connector
Wire Gauge 50-pin connector
(P6202) (P6203)
(P6202)
20-24 AWG [1] 28 AWG [3] 22-28 AWG
Garmin P/N 336-00022-00 336-00022-01 336-00021-00
Military P/N M39029/63-368 N/A M39029/58-360
AMP N/A N/A 204370-2
Positronic N/A N/A MC8522D
ITT Cannon N/A N/A 030-2042-000

Table 3-2 Recommended Crimp Tools

Hand 20-24 AWG (P6201/P6202) [3] 22-28 AWG (P6203)
Manufacturer Crimping Insertion/ Insertion/
Positioner Positioner
Tool Extract Tool Extract Tool
M81969/14-02 M81969/14-01
Military P/N M22520/2-01 M22520/2-08 M22520/2-09
M81969/1-02 M81969/1-04
Positronic 9507 9502-11 N/A N/A N/A
ITT Cannon 995-0001-584 N/A N/A 995-0001-739 N/A
AMP 601966-1 N/A N/A 601966-6 91067-1
Daniels AFM8 K13-1 N/A K42 N/A
Astro 615717 615724 N/A 615725 N/A

[1] Contacts listed are not to be used for configuration module wiring. Use the contacts
supplied with the configuration module when installing configuration module wires in
P6202.
[2] Non-Garmin part numbers shown are not maintained by Garmin and are subject to change
without notice.
[3] For configuration module pins, ensure that the crimp tool is set to crimp 28 AWG wire (indenter
setting of “4”).

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 3-6
3.6 Backshell Assemblies
3.6.1 Backshell Assembly and D-Subminiature (D-sub) Connectors

CAUTION
Do not attempt to use the self-tapping screws supplied in the slide lock kit, as these will
damage the backshell housing.

The GDU 620 connector kit (P/N 011-01656-00) includes three backshell assemblies and three ground
adapter assemblies. Backshell connectors give the installer the ability to terminate shield grounds at the
backshell housing using the shield block ground kit. Table 3-3 lists Garmin part numbers for the GDU 620
D-sub connectors and the backshell assemblies.

Table 3-3 Backshell Assembly

Reference
Figure 3-1
Description Garmin P/N Notes
through
Figure 3-3
Cast housing (P6201/P6203) 125-00084-00
1 [2]
Cast housing (P6202) 125-00085-00

2 Shield block 117-00147-01 [3]

3 Screw, 4-40 x.250, FLHP100°, SS/P, nylon 211-63234-08 [3]

4 Slide lock spring N/A [4]

5 Slide lock lever N/A [4]

6 Screw, 4-40x.375, PHP, SS/P, w/nylon 211-60234-10 [2] [5]

7 Strain relief 115-00499-03 [2]

Cover (P6201/P6203) 115-00500-03

8 [2]
Cover (P6202) 115-00500-04

9 Screw, 4-40x.187, FLHP100, SS/P, w/nylon 211-63234-06 [2]

Connector, D-sub, 37 socket (P6201) 330-00502-37

10 Connector, D-sub, 50 socket (P6202) 330-00502-50 [5]
Connector, D-sub, HD, 62 pin (P6203) 330-00366-62

Multiple conductor shielded cable

11 As Required [6]
(Refer to the interconnect diagrams in appendix C)

12 Shield terminator As Required [6] [7]

13 Wire, insulated, 20 – 22 AWG (3 inches max length) As Required [6] [7]

Socket contacts, #20 (P6201/P6202) 336-00022-00

14
Pin contacts, #22D (P6203) 336-00021-00

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 3-7
 Reference
Figure 3-1
Description Garmin P/N Notes
through
Figure 3-3
MS25036-149,
15 Ring terminal, #8, insulated, 18-22 AWG, 14-16 AWG MS25036-153, [6]
MS25036-156

MS51957-42,
16 Screw, PHP, 8-32 x .312", stainless or cad plated steel [6]
MS35206-242

Split washer, #8, (.045" compressed thickness) MS35338-137,

17 [6]
stainless or cad-plated steel MS35338-42

Flat washer, #8, .032" thick, .174"ID, .375" OD, NAS1149CN832R,

18 [6]
stainless or cad plated steel NAS1149FN832P

19 Silicone fusion tape 249-00114-00 [6]

[1] All items are applicable to P6201, P6202 and P6203, unless otherwise specified.
[2] Supplied as part of Backshell Kits, P/N 011-00950-03 (P6201/P6203) and P/N 011-00950-04
(P6202).
[3] Supplied as part of Ground Adapter Kit, P/N 011-01169-01.
[4] Supplied as part of Slide Lock Kit, P/N 330-90006-03 (P6201/P6203) and P/N 330-90006-04
(P6202).
[5] Supplied as part of GDU 620 Connector Kit, P/N 011-01656-00.
[6] Not supplied – must be purchased separately.
[7] Solder sleeve with pre-installed lead may be used instead of items 12 and 13.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 3-8
3.6.1.1 Shield Block Assembly Procedure

CAUTION
Placing the grooved side of the strain relief across the cable bundle may damage wires.

CAUTION
When mounting the slide lock, use only the specified screws (6). Do not attempt to use the
self-tapping screws supplied in the slide lock kit, as these will damage the backshell
housing.

NOTE
Solder sleeves with pre-installed shield drains may be used instead of separate shield
terminators and individual wires.

NOTE
Solder Sleeves with pre-installed lead: A preferred solder sleeves is the Raychem S03
Series with the thermochromic temperature indicator. These solder sleeves come with a
pre-installed lead and effectively take the place of items 12 and 13. For detailed
instructions on product use, refer to Raychem installation procedure.

NOTE
Each tapped hole on the shield block (2) may accommodate only two ring terminals (15).
It is preferred that a maximum of two wires (13) be terminated per ring terminal. Two
wires per ring terminal will necessitate the use of a ring terminal, #8, insulated, 14-16
AWG (MS25036-153). If only a single wire is left or if only a single wire is needed for this
connector a ring terminal, #8, insulated, 18-22 AWG (MS25036-149) can accommodate
this single wire. If more wires exist for the connector than two per ring terminal, it is
recommended that only three wires are terminated in each ring terminal to ensure a good
electrical connection.

The parts for the connector and backshell assemblies for the GDU 620 installations are listed in table 3-1.
The GDU 620 connector kit (P/N 011-01656-00) includes three Garmin backshell assemblies and three
Garmin ground adapter assemblies. Backshell connectors give the installer the ability to terminate shield
grounds at the backshell housing using the Shield Block ground kit. Table 3-3 lists Garmin part numbers
for the GDU 620 D-sub connectors and the backshell assemblies.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 3-9
 Figure 3-1 Connector and Backshell Assembly

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 3-10
 Preferred Method

Alternate Method

Figure 3-2 Shielded Cable Preparation

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 3-11
 Preferred Method
Figure 3-3 Shield Termination on Backshell Assembly
Sheet 1 of 2

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 3-12
 Alternate Method

Figure 3-3 Shield Termination on Backshell Assembly

Sheet 2 of 2

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 3-13
Prepare all of the shielded cables as shown in figure 3-2. Refer to figure 3-3 for details of the shield
termination to the connector backshell.
1. At the end of the shielded cable (11), strip back a 2.5 inch maximum length of the jacket to expose
the braid.
2. Remove the exposed braid.
3. Carefully score the jacket 1/4" to 5/16" from the end and remove the jacket to leave the braid
exposed.
4. Connect a 20 or 22 AWG wire (13) to the exposed shield of the prepared cable assembly.
Refer to figure 3-2. AC 43.13 maybe a helpful reference for termination techniques.
5. Slide a shield terminator (12) onto the prepared cable assembly (11).
6. Connect the wire (13) to the shield using a heat gun approved for use with solder sleeves. The
chosen size of solder sleeve must accommodate both the number of conductors present in the cable
and the wire (13) to be attached.
7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 as needed for the remaining shielded cables.
8. Crimp contacts (14) onto the wires and terminate in the connector (10) in accordance with the
aircraft wiring drawings.
9. For P6202, install the configuration module wires into the connector. Refer to section 3.6.1.2.1,
steps 1 and 2 for instructions on installing the configuration module.
Assemble the backshell onto the connector
1. Attach the shield block (2) to the backshell (1) by inserting the flathead screws (3) through the
holes on the shield block and threading into the tapped holes on the backshell (1).
Refer to figure 3-1.
2. Place the slide lock (5) over the connector (10).
3. While holding the slide lock in place, attach the connector/slide lock to the backshell (1) by
inserting two screws (6) through the holes on the connector and threading into the tapped holes on
the backshell (1). (Refer to figure 3-1.)
4. Wrap the cable bundle with silicone fusion tape (19 or a similar version) at the point where the
backshell strain relief and cast housing will contact the cable bundle.
5. Place the smooth side of the backshell strain relief (7) across the cable bundle and secure using the
three screws (6).
6. For P6202, install the configuration module into the connector backshell. Refer to section 3.6.1.2.1
steps 3 through 6 for instructions on installing the configuration module into the backshell.
7. Insert the slide lock spring (4) into the connector backshell (1).
8. Attach the cover (8) to the backshell using two screws (9).
9. Install ring terminals (15) onto the wires (13), grouping wires as appropriate for the connector.
10. Terminate the ring terminals to the shield block (2) by placing items on the pan head screw (16) in
the following order: split washer (17), flat washer (18), first ring terminal, second ring terminal if
needed, before finally inserting the screw into the tapped holes on the shield block.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 3-14
3.6.1.2 Configuration Module Installation (P6202 Only)

NOTE
The socket contacts supplied with the GDU 620 configuration module are specifically
made to accommodate 28 AWG wire. The crimp tool should have the indenter set to “4”
when crimping these contacts to the configuration module harness.

Table 3-4 Configuration Module Wire Color Reference Chart

Color Function P6202 Contact

Black Ground 50
Red Vcc 49
Yellow Data 32
White Clock 33

3.6.1.2.1 Configuration Module Assembly with Spacer (Existing Installations)

Table 3-5 Configuration Module Kit - 011-00979-02

Refer to
Description Garmin P/N
Figure 3-4
1 Configuration Module, PCB Board Assembly w/EEPROM 012-00605-00

2 Spacer, Configuration Module 213-00043-00

3 4-Conductor Harness 325-00122-00

4 Socket Contact, Crimp, #20 336-00022-01

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 3-15
Refer to figure 3-4 for details and item numbers referenced in the following procedure.
1. Strip 0.17 inches of insulation from each wire.
2. Crimp socket contacts (4) onto each wire of the four-conductor wire harness (3).
3. Insert newly crimped socket contacts and wires (3, 4) into the appropriate connector housing
location as shown in figure 3-4, figure C-1 and figure C-2.
4. Apply the spacer (2) by wrapping it around the PCB board (1) making sure to insert the plastic
connector mounted on the board into the hole provided in the spacer.
5. Plug the four-conductor wire harness (3) into the connector on the PCB board (1).
6. With pad (2) in position, insert PCB board (1) into the backshell recess.
7. Orient the connector housing so that the inserted four conductor wire harness (3) is on the same
side of the backshell as the inserted PCB board (1).

Figure 3-4 Backshell Assembly (Configuration Module with Spacer)

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 3-16
3.6.1.2.2 Configuration Module Assembly with Potted PCB (New Installations)
Table 3-6 lists part numbers for the configuration module kit, which is used with potted PCBs and is the
preferred assembly to be used.
Table 3-6 Configuration Module Kit - P/N 011-00979-05

Refer to
Description Garmin P/N
Figure 3-5
1 Configuration Module, PCB Board Assembly w/EEPROM 011-02178-00

3 4-Conductor Harness 325-00122-00

4 Socket Contact, Crimp, #20 336-00022-01

8 2x

Figure 3-5 Backshell Assembly (Potted Configuration Module)

Refer to figure 3-5 for details and item numbers referenced in the following procedure.
1. Strip 0.17 inches of insulation from each wire.
2. Crimp socket contacts (4) onto each wire of the four-conductor wire harness (3).
3. Insert the newly crimped socket contacts and wires (3, 4) into the appropriate connector housing
(5) location as specified by the interconnect drawings in appendix C.
4. Plug the four-conductor wire harness (3) into the connector on the PCB (1).
5. Insert the PCB (1) into the backshell (6) recess.
6. Attach cover (7) to backshell (6) using screws (8).

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 3-17
3.7 Unit Installation
The GDU 620 is mounted in the panel with six 6/32" socket head cap screws. Depending on installation
specifics, the unit can be flush mounted with a standard 6-32 nut plate to an existing panel, panel doubler,
or new sub-panel. A trim plate may be used if desired.
3.8 Continued Airworthiness
Maintenance of the GDU 620 is “on condition” only. For regulatory periodic functional checks, refer to
approved aircraft maintenance manuals or manual supplements for actual aircraft maintenance
requirements.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 3-18
4 SYSTEM INTERCONNECTS
4.1 Pin Function List...............................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.1 P6201 Connector ........................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.2 P6202 Connector ........................................................................................................................4-4
4.1.3 P6203 Connector ........................................................................................................................4-6
4.2 Functional Descriptions ....................................................................................................................4-8
4.2.1 Power..........................................................................................................................................4-8
4.2.2 Configuration Module ................................................................................................................4-8
4.2.3 Serial Data ..................................................................................................................................4-9
4.2.4 Lighting ....................................................................................................................................4-12
4.2.5 Autopilot Interfaces..................................................................................................................4-12
4.2.6 Flight Director Interface...........................................................................................................4-14
4.2.7 Discrete Inputs..........................................................................................................................4-14
4.2.8 Discrete Outputs .......................................................................................................................4-17
4.2.9 ADF Input ................................................................................................................................4-19
4.2.10 ARINC 453/708 Inputs (software v5.00 or later) ....................................................................4-19
4.2.11 Time Mark Input ......................................................................................................................4-20
4.2.12 Message Audio Output.............................................................................................................4-20
4.2.13 Composite Video Inputs (software v4.00 or later) ...................................................................4-20

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 4-1
4.1 Pin Function List
4.1.1 P6201 Connector
View of J6201 connector from back of unit.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37

Pin Function I/O

1 COMPOSITE VIDEO IN 1 (software v4.00 or later) In
2 RESERVED --
3 AUDIO INHIBIT IN* (software v4.00 or later/G500H only) In
4 CDU SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* In
5 COMPOSITE MODE INPUT*/RA Mute* (software v6.01 or later/G500H only) In
6 GSR STATUS IN* (software v4.00 or later) In
7 WEIGHT-ON-WHEELS IN* (software v4.00 or later/G500H only) In
8 GPSS ENABLE IN*/RA Mute (software v7.01 or later/G500H only) In
9 FD ENABLE IN In
10 ADF VALID IN In
11 ETHERNET IN 1A In
12 ETHERNET IN 1B In
13 ETHERNET OUT 1A Out
14 ETHERNET OUT 1B Out
15 FLIGHT DIRECTOR PITCH UP In
16 FLIGHT DIRECTOR PITCH DOWN In
17 ADF X/COS IN In
18 ADF Y/SIN IN In
19 RESERVED --
20 COMPOSITE VIDEO IN 2 (software v4.00 or later) In
21 RESERVED --
22 GROUND --
23 DISCRETE OUT 1* Out
24 DISCRETE OUT 2* Out
25 DISCRETE OUT 3* Out
26 DISCRETE OUT 4* Out
27 DISCRETE OUT 5* Out
28 AUDIO OUT HI Out
29 AUDIO OUT LO Out

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 4-2
 Pin Function I/O
30 ETHERNET IN 2A In
31 ETHERNET IN 2B In
32 ETHERNET OUT 2A Out
33 ETHERNET OUT 2B Out
34 FLIGHT DIRECTOR ROLL LEFT In
35 FLIGHT DIRECTOR ROLL RIGHT In
36 ADF DC REF IN In
37 RESERVED --

An asterisk (*) following a signal name denotes that the signal is an Active-Low, requiring a ground to
activate. If there is no asterisk, the signal is an Active-High.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 4-3
4.1.2 P6202 Connector
View of J6202 connector from back of unit.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

Pin Function I/O

1 AIRCRAFT POWER In
2 AIRCRAFT GROUND --
3 ARINC 429 OUT 1A Out
4 ARINC 429 IN 1A In
5 ARINC 429 IN 2A In
6 ARINC 429 IN 3A In
7 ARINC 429 IN 4A In
8 ARINC 429 IN 5A In
9 ARINC 429 IN 6A In
10 RS-232 IN 1 In
11 RS-232 IN 2 In
12 RS-232 IN 3 In
13 RS-232 IN 4 In
14 RS-232 IN 5 In
15 LIGHTING BUS HI In
16 LIGHTING BUS LO In
17 RESERVED --
18 AIRCRAFT POWER In
19 AIRCRAFT GROUND --
20 ARINC 429 OUT 1B Out
21 ARINC 429 IN 1B In
22 ARINC 429 IN 2B In
23 ARINC 429 IN 3B In
24 ARINC 429 IN 4B In
25 ARINC 429 IN 5B In
26 ARINC 429 IN 6B In
27 RS-232 OUT 1 Out
28 RS-232 OUT 2 Out
29 RS-232 OUT 3 Out
30 RS-232 OUT 4 Out

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 4-4
 Pin Function I/O
31 RS-232 OUT 5 Out
32 CONFIG MODULE DATA I/O
33 CONFIG MODULE CLOCK Out
34 AIRCRAFT POWER In
35 AIRCRAFT GROUND --
36 DEMO MODE SELECT* In
37 RESERVED --
38 GROUND --
39 RESERVED --
40 TIME MARK IN 1A In
41 TIME MARK IN 1B In
42 TIME MARK IN 2A In
43 TIME MARK IN 2B In
44 RS-232 GND 1 --
45 RS-232 GND 2 --
46 RS-232 GND 3 --
47 RS-232 GND 4 --
48 RS-232 GND 5 --
49 CONFIG MODULE POWER Out
50 CONFIG MODULE GND Out

An asterisk (*) following a signal name denotes that the signal is an Active-Low, requiring a ground to
activate. If there is no asterisk, the signal is an Active-High.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 4-5
4.1.3 P6203 Connector
View of J6203 connector from back of unit.
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22

62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43

Pin Function I/O

1 ARINC 429 OUT 2A Out
2 ARINC 429 OUT 3A Out
3 ARINC 429 OUT 4A Out
4 ARINC 429 IN 7A In
5 ARINC 429 IN 8A In
6 RS-232 IN 6 In
7 RS-232 IN 7 In
8 RS-232 IN 8 In
9 RS-422 IN 1A/RS-485 1A I/O
10 RS-422 OUT 1A/RS-485 2A I/O
11 RS-422 IN 2A/RS-485 3A I/O
12 RS-422 OUT 2A/RS-485 4A I/O
13 RESERVED --
14 ARINC 708/453 IN 1A In
15 ARINC 708/453 IN 1 TERM A In
16 ARINC 708/453 IN 2A In
17 ARINC 708/453 IN 2 TERM A In
18 A/P HEADING ERROR HI Out
19 A/P COURSE ERROR HI Out
20 A/P AC REF HI In
21 GROUND --
22 RESERVED --
23 ARINC 429 OUT 2B Out
24 ARINC 429 OUT 3B Out
25 ARINC 429 OUT 4B Out
26 ARINC 429 IN 7B In
27 ARINC 429 IN 8B In
28 RS-232 OUT 6 Out
29 RS-232 OUT 7 Out

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 4-6
 Pin Function I/O
30 RS-232 OUT 8 Out
31 RS-422 IN 1B/RS-485 1B I/O
32 RS-422 OUT 1B/RS-485 2B I/O
33 RS-422 IN 2B/RS-485 3B I/O
34 RS-422 OUT 2B/RS-485 4B I/O
35 RESERVED --
36 ARINC 708/453 IN 1B In
37 ARINC 708/453 IN 1 TERM B In
38 ARINC 708/453 IN 2B In
39 ARINC 708/453 IN 2 TERM B In
40 A/P HEADING ERROR LO Out
41 A/P COURSE ERROR LO Out
42 A/P AC REF LO In
43 RESERVED --
44 DISCRETE OUT 6* Out
45 DISCRETE OUT 7* Out
46 DISCRETE OUT 8* Out
47 DISCRETE OUT 9* Out
48 GROUND --
49 RS-232 GND 6 --
50 RS-232 GND 7 --
51 RS-232 GND 8 --
52 LATERAL +LEFT OUT Out
53 LATERAL +RIGHT OUT Out
54 LATERAL +FLAG OUT Out
55 LATERAL –FLAG OUT Out
56 VERTICAL +UP OUT Out
57 VERTICAL +DOWN OUT Out
58 VERTICAL +FLAG OUT Out
59 VERTICAL –FLAG OUT Out
60 LATERAL SUPERFLAG OUT Out
61 VERTICAL SUPERFLAG OUT Out
62 RESERVED --

An asterisk (*) following a signal name denotes that the signal is an Active-Low, requiring a ground to
activate. If there is no asterisk, the signal is an Active-High.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 4-7
4.2 Functional Descriptions
4.2.1 Power
The GDU 620 will accept input power from 9 to 33 VDC. At least two of the power inputs must be
connected.

Table 4-1 Aircraft Power/Ground

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O
AIRCRAFT POWER P6202 1 In
AIRCRAFT POWER P6202 18 In
AIRCRAFT POWER P6202 34 In
AIRCRAFT GND P6202 2 --
AIRCRAFT GND P6202 19 --
AIRCRAFT GND P6202 35 --

4.2.2 Configuration Module

The GDU 620 stores installation-specific configuration information in an aircraft configuration module
located in the backshell of P6202. This eliminates the need to set up additional aircraft specific
configuration items if a new GDU 620 is installed. The configuration module is mounted within the
connector backshell as described in section 3.6.1.2.

Table 4-2 Configuration Module Pins

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O
CONFIG MODULE DATA P6202 32 I/O
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK P6202 33 Out
CONFIG MODULE POWER P6202 49 Out
CONFIG MODULE GROUND P6202 50 Out

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 4-8
4.2.3 Serial Data
4.2.3.1 RS-232
The RS-232 outputs conform to EIA Standard RS-232C with an output voltage swing of at least ±5 V
when driving a standard RS-232 load. The serial ports can receive/transmit serial data from/to various
sources. Refer to section 5.5.1.9 for configuration information. Default functions are shown in table 4-3.

Table 4-3 RS-232 Ports

Pin Name Function Connector Pin I/O
RS-232 IN 1 AHRS P6202 10 In
RS-232 OUT 1 AHRS (GPS 1 DATA) P6202 27 Out
RS-232 GND 1 -- P6202 44 --
RS-232 IN 2 ADC P6202 11 In
RS-232 OUT 2 ADC P6202 28 Out
RS-232 GND 2 -- P6202 45 --
RS-232 IN 3 GPS 1 P6202 12 In
RS-232 OUT 3 GPS 1 P6202 29 Out
RS-232 GND 3 -- P6202 46 --
RS-232 IN 4 GPS 2 P6202 13 In
RS-232 OUT 4 AHRS (GPS 2 DATA) P6202 30 Out
RS-232 GND 4 -- P6202 47 --
RS-232 IN 5 SL30 [1] P6202 14 In
RS-232 OUT 5 SL30 [1] P6202 31 Out
RS-232 GND 5 -- P6202 48 --
RS-232 IN 6 IRIDIUM (GSR 56) [1] P6203 6 In
RS-232 OUT 6 IRIDIUM (GSR 56) [1] P6203 28 Out
RS-232 GND 6 -- P6203 49 --
RS-232 IN 7 GAD 43 P6203 7 In
RS-232 OUT 7 GAD 43 P6203 29 Out
RS-232 GND 7 -- P6203 50 --
RS-232 IN 8 ALTITUDE DATA (software v3.00 or later) [1] P6203 8 In
RS-232 OUT 8 ALTITUDE DATA (software v3.00 or later) [1] P6203 30 Out
RS-232 GND 8 -- P6203 51 --

[1] With software v7.00 or later, this port may be configured to perform another function.
Refer to section 5.5.1.9 for more information.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 4-9
4.2.3.2 ARINC 429
The ARINC 429 outputs conform to ARINC 429 electrical specifications when loaded with up to five
standard ARINC 429 receivers. Default functions are shown in the following table.
Refer to section 5.5.1.8 for configuration information.

Table 4-4 ARINC 429

Pin Name Function Connector Pin I/O
ARINC 429 IN 1A AHRS P6202 4 In
ARINC 429 IN 1B AHRS P6202 21 In
ARINC 429 IN 2A ADC P6202 5 In
ARINC 429 IN 2B ADC P6202 22 In
ARINC 429 IN 3A GPS 1 P6202 6 In
ARINC 429 IN 3B GPS 1 P6202 23 In
ARINC 429 IN 4A NAV 1 [1] P6202 7 In
ARINC 429 IN 4B NAV 1 P6202 24 In
ARINC 429 IN 5A GPS 2 P6202 8 In
ARINC 429 IN 5B GPS 2 P6202 25 In
ARINC 429 IN 6A NAV 2 P6202 9 In
ARINC 429 IN 6B NAV 2 P6202 26 In
ARINC 429 IN 7A TRAFFIC SYSTEM P6203 4 In
ARINC 429 IN 7B TRAFFIC SYSTEM P6203 26 In
ARINC 429 IN 8A RADAR ALTIMETER P6203 5 In
ARINC 429 IN 8B RADAR ALTIMETER P6203 27 In
ARINC 429 OUT 1A GPS P6202 3 Out
ARINC 429 OUT 1B GPS P6202 20 Out
ARINC 429 OUT 2A AUTOPILOT P6203 1 Out
ARINC 429 OUT 2B AUTOPILOT P6203 23 Out
ARINC 429 OUT 3A P6203 2 Out
ARINC 429 OUT 3B P6203 24 Out
ARINC 429 OUT 4A P6203 3 Out
ARINC 429 OUT 4B P6203 25 Out

[1] This port may be configured to perform another function. Refer to section 5.5.1.8 for more
information.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 4-10
4.2.3.3 Ethernet
This Ethernet based HSDB (High Speed Data Bus) meets the hardware aspects of IEEE standard 802.3 for
10 base T Ethernet communications.

Table 4-5 Ethernet

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O
ETHERNET IN 1A P6201 11 In
ETHERNET IN 1B P6201 12 In
ETHERNET OUT 1A P6201 13 Out
ETHERNET OUT 1B P6201 14 Out
ETHERNET IN 2A P6201 30 In
ETHERNET IN 2B P6201 31 In
ETHERNET OUT 2A P6201 32 Out
ETHERNET OUT 2B P6201 33 Out

4.2.3.4 RS-422/RS-485
The RS-422/485 ports conform to EIA Standard RS-485 (RS-422 when configured as RS-422) with a
differential output voltage swing of at least ± 1.5V when driving a standard RS-422/485 load. The serial
ports can receive/transmit serial data from/to various sources. Refer to section 5.5.1.9 for configuration
information.

Table 4-6 RS-422/RS-485

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O
RS-422 IN 1A/RS-485 1A P6203 9 I/O
RS-422 OUT 1A/RS-485 2A P6203 10 I/O
RS-422 IN 2A/RS-485 3A P6203 11 I/O
RS-422 OUT 2A/RS-485 4A P6203 12 I/O
RS-422 IN 1B/RS-485 1B P6203 31 I/O
RS-422 OUT 1B/RS-485 2B P6203 32 I/O
RS-422 IN 2B/RS-485 3B P6203 33 I/O
RS-422 OUT 2B/RS-485 4B P6203 34 I/O

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 4-11
4.2.4 Lighting
The GDU 620 display and keys can be configured to track 28 VDC, 14 VDC, 5 VDC, or 5 VAC lighting
buses using this input. Alternatively, the GDU 620 display and keys can automatically adjust for ambient
lighting conditions based on the photocells on the front of the unit. Refer to section 5.5.1.3 for
configuration information.

Table 4-7 Lighting

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O
LIGHTING BUS HI P6202 15 In
LIGHTING BUS LO P6202 16 In

4.2.5 Autopilot Interfaces

The GDU 620 is capable of interfacing to numerous autopilots using the interfaces described below. Refer
to section 5.5.5.1 for configuration information.
4.2.5.1 Heading and Course Datum Output
The GDU 620 provides AC or DC heading and course datum outputs based upon the setting of the heading
bug and course pointer on the HSI. An input for AC reference voltage is provided and used with autopilots
that use AC datums.
When the GPSS Enable In* input is grounded, the heading datum output will be based upon GPSS
information received from the selected navigator. Refer to section 4.2.7.4 for additional details. Refer to
section 5.5.5.1 for configuration information.

Table 4-8 Heading and Course Datum Output

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O
A/P HEADING ERROR HI P6203 18 Out
A/P COURSE ERROR HI P6203 19 Out
A/P AC REF HI P6203 20 In
A/P HEADING ERROR LO P6203 40 Out
A/P COURSE ERROR LO P6203 41 Out
A/P AC REF LO P6203 42 In
GPSS ENABLE IN* P6202 8 In

An asterisk (*) following a signal name denotes that the signal is an Active-Low, requiring a ground to
activate. If there is no asterisk, the signal is an Active-High.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 4-12
4.2.5.2 Deviation Outputs
Each deviation output provides ±150 mV full scale and is capable of driving up to a 333-ohm load (i.e., up
to a maximum of three 1 kilohm loads connected in parallel).

Table 4-9 Deviation Outputs

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O
LATERAL +LEFT OUT P6203 52 Out
LATERAL +RIGHT OUT P6203 53 Out
VERTICAL +UP OUT P6203 56 Out
VERTICAL +DOWN OUT P6203 57 Out

4.2.5.3 Flag Outputs

Each low-level flag output provides 375 mV when valid information is present and is capable of driving up
to a 333 ohm load (i.e., up to a maximum of three 1 kilohm loads connected in parallel).

Table 4-10 Flag Outputs

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O
LATERAL +FLAG OUT P6203 54 Out
LATERAL -FLAG OUT P6203 55 Out
VERTICAL +FLAG OUT P6203 58 Out
VERTICAL -FLAG OUT P6203 59 Out

4.2.5.4 Superflag Outputs

Each superflag output provides (Vin – 2) volts relative to ground when valid information is present, where
Vin represents the aircraft power supplied to the GDU 620. Each output is capable of supplying up to
250 mA.

Table 4-11 Superflag Outputs

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O
LATERAL SUPERFLAG OUT P6203 60 Out
VERTICAL SUPERFLAG OUT P6203 61 Out

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 4-13
4.2.6 Flight Director Interface
The flight director pitch and roll analog inputs allow an external source (usually an autopilot) to control the
display of the flight director bars on the GDU 620.
The flight director interface has a discrete input associated with it. When configured for an external flight
director, this input can be used by the GDU 620 to determine whether or not to display the FD bars. Refer
to section 4.2.7.5 for additional details. Refer to section 5.5.5.2 for configuration information.

Table 4-12 Flight Director

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O
FLIGHT DIRECTOR PITCH UP P6201 15 In
FLIGHT DIRECTOR PITCH DOWN P6201 16 In
FLIGHT DIRECTOR ROLL LEFT P6201 34 In
FLIGHT DIRECTOR ROLL RIGHT P6201 35 In

4.2.7 Discrete Inputs

An asterisk (*) following a signal name denotes that the signal is an Active-Low, requiring a ground to
activate. If there is no asterisk, the signal is Active-High.
Active-Low discrete inputs are considered active if either the voltage to ground is <3.5 VDC or the
resistance to ground is <375 ohm. These inputs are considered inactive if the voltage to ground is
6.5-33 VDC or the resistance to ground is >100 kilohm.
Active-High discrete inputs are considered active if either the voltage to ground is > 6.5 VDC. These
inputs are considered inactive if the voltage to ground is < 3.5 VDC or the resistance to ground is
< 375 ohm. The GDU 620 has 10 discrete inputs (eight Active-Low and two Active-High).

Table 4-13 Discrete Inputs

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O
AUDIO INHIBIT IN* (software v4.00 or later – G500H only) P6201 3 In
CDU SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* P6201 4 In
EIS COMPOSITE IN* (software v6.01 or later – G500H only) [1] P6201 5 In
GSR STATUS IN* (software v4.00 or later) P6201 6 In
WEIGHT-ON-WHEELS IN* (software v4.00 or later – G500H only) P6201 7 In
GPSS ENABLE* (software v7.01 or later – G500H only) [1] P6201 8 In
FD ENABLE IN P6201 9 In
ADF VALID IN P6201 10 In
DEMO MODE SELECT* P6202 36 In

[1] Pin may be configured for EIS Composite In*, RA Mute*, or GPSS Enable*.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 4-14
4.2.7.1 Audio Inhibit In* (software v4.00 or later)
G500H
A momentary low on this input while a Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) Caution is active will
cause current FLTA Caution aural to be suppressed (the visual display is not affected). Subsequent FLTA
Caution aurals will not be inhibited unless this input is actuated again. FLTA Warning aurals are not
affected by this input.
G500/G600
This function is not currently implemented.
4.2.7.2 CDU System ID Program*
The CDU System ID Program input is used to determine if the GDU 620 is the #1 or #2 display in a dual
GDU installation. Leave this input open for single GDU installations, or if the GDU 620 is the #1 display.
Connect this input to P6201-22 (ground) if the GDU 620 is the #2 display.
CDU System ID can be configured in software v6.01 or later. When USE DISCRETE is selected in the
System Configuration Page, the CDU System ID Program input will be used to determine if the
GDU 620 is the #1 or #2 display in a dual GDU installation. If GDU 1, GDU 2, or GDU 3 are selected,
then the CDU System ID Program input will be ignored.
4.2.7.3 EIS Composite In*
EIS Composite In* is used to determine if the GDU 620 is in Normal or Composite mode, when the GDU
is configured for EIS. An open on this input will enable composite mode and display the PFD and EIS
screens. This pin must be open for a single EIS GDU installation.
4.2.7.4 GPSS Enable*
The GPSS Enable* discrete input may be used to enable the GPS Steering (roll steering) function of the
GDU 620. When the GPSS function is enabled, the heading datum (heading error) output to the autopilot
will be driven based upon the roll steering command received from the selected GPS. A low on this input
will enable the GPSS function. An open on this input will disable the GPSS function and the heading
datum output will be based upon the setting of the heading bug.
4.2.7.5 FD Enable In
When enabled, the FD Enable In discrete input is used to determine whether or not the FD bars should be
displayed (refer to section 5.5.5.2). A high on this input will cause the FD bars to be displayed based upon
the flight director inputs (refer to section 4.2.6). A low or open on this input will cause the FD bars to be
removed. When disabled, this input is not used when the GDU 620 determines whether or not the FD bars
should be displayed.
4.2.7.6 Demo Mode Select*

CAUTION
Do not connect DEMO MODE SELECT in an aircraft installation.

The Demo Mode Select discrete input may be used to select Demo Mode on the GDU 620. A low on this
pin, at time of unit power-up, invokes the Demo Mode. Demo Mode allows the GDU 620 to simulate
inputs from the remainder of the G600 system.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 4-15
4.2.7.7 ADF Valid In
When the interfacing ADF is configured with +Superflag as Present, the ADF Valid In discrete input is
used to determine whether or not the ADF bearing is valid. A high on this input will cause the ADF bearing
pointer to be positioned based on the ADF input (refer to section 4.2.9). A low or open on this input will
cause the ADF bearing pointer to be removed if it is being displayed.
4.2.7.8 GSR Status In* (software v4.00 or later)
The GSR Status In discrete input is used to determine the status of the GSR 56 Iridium Data Link System.
A low on this input indicates that the GSR 56 is valid. A high or open indicates that the GSR 56 is invalid.
4.2.7.9 Weight-on-Wheels In* (software v4.00 or later – G500H only)

NOTE
If the Weight-on-Wheels indicates on ground but the ground speed is greater than 20 kts
OR the true airspeed is greater than 50 kts, the GDU 620 will override this input and
consider the system to be airborne.

The Weight-on-Wheels In discrete input is used to determine the air/ground status for helicopters (the
status of this discrete input is displayed for the G500/G600, but this input is ignored). A low on this input
indicates that the aircraft is on the ground. A high or open indicates that the aircraft is in the air.
4.2.7.10 RA Mute* (software v7.01 or later – G500H only)
As long as this input is grounded (active), new radar altimeter aural alerts will not play.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 4-16
4.2.8 Discrete Outputs
The GDU 620 has eight discrete outputs that are Active-Low. Each is an open drain output capable of
sinking 250 mA when active. Each discrete output function is configurable. Refer to section 5.5.1.12.

Table 4-14 Discrete Outputs

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O
DISCRETE OUT 1* (Default Pin Function: TAWS Audio Active Out – section
P6201 23 Out
4.2.8.1)
DISCRETE OUT 2* (Default Pin Function: Altitude Capture – section 4.2.8.7) P6201 24 Out
DISCRETE OUT 3* (Default Pin Function: A/P Backcourse – section 4.2.8.8) P6201 25 Out
DISCRETE OUT 4* (Default Pin Function: TIS/TAS Standby – section 4.2.8.2) P6201 26 Out
DISCRETE OUT 5* (Default Pin Function: TAS Test – section 4.2.8.2) P6201 27 Out
DISCRETE OUT 6* (Default Pin Function: GPS Annunciate – section 4.2.8.3) P6203 44 Out
DISCRETE OUT 7* (Default Pin Function: GPS Select – section 4.2.8.4) P6203 45 Out
DISCRETE OUT 8* (Default Pin Function: ILS/GPS Approach – section 4.2.8.5) P6203 46 Out
DISCRETE OUT 9* (Default Pin Function: GSR 56 Remote Power – section
P6203 47 Out
4.2.8.9)

An asterisk (*) following a signal name denotes that the signal is Active-Low, producing a low (ground) on
the output when active.
4.2.8.1 TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE OUT*
Function not currently implemented.
4.2.8.2 TIS/TAS STANDBY* and TAS TEST*
These discrete outputs are used to control compatible traffic systems.
The operation of these outputs is determined by the type of traffic system that is configured. Refer to
section 5.5.1.1.
4.2.8.3 GPS ANNUNCIATE*
The GPS annunciate output is driven low whenever GPS data is selected for display on the HSI. Otherwise,
it is open.
4.2.8.4 GPS SELECT*
The GPS Select Output is driven low when GPS data is being displayed on the CDI/HSI and the ILS/GPS
Approach Output is not active. It is intended for use with autopilots having a GPS Select input (such as the
Bendix/King KAP 140 and KFC 225), enabling the autopilot to capture vertical guidance while GPS data
is being displayed on the CDI/HSI.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 4-17
4.2.8.5 ILS/GPS APPROACH*
The ILS/GPS Approach Output is driven low when:
 GPS navigation is selected on the CDI and the selected GPS receiver is in Approach mode, or
 VLOC navigation is selected on the CDI and the selected navigation receiver has an ILS channel
tuned
This output is open otherwise.
This output may be connected to the ILS Energize input of an autopilot or flight director to provide higher
autopilot gain while the selected navigation source is in the ILS or GPS Approach modes of operation.
4.2.8.6 GSR RMT PWR OUT* (software v4.00 or later)
The GSR Remote Power Output is driven low when the GDU 620 commands the GSR 56 ON. Otherwise,
it is open.
4.2.8.7 ALTITUDE CAPTURE* (software v4.00 or later)
The Altitude Capture discrete output is provided for the autopilot to indicate when to capture the altitude
based on the altitude alerter setting. This discrete is momentarily driven low to command the autopilot to
capture the current altitude. It is open otherwise. The behavior of this discrete is configured in
section 5.5.5.1.
4.2.8.8 A/P BACKCOURSE* (software v3.00 or later)
The A/P Backcourse discrete output is provided for the autopilot to indicate when a backcourse is active.
This discrete is driven low when a localizer is selected as the navigation source for the CDI and the course
pointer is more than 90° from the current aircraft heading. Otherwise, it is open.
4.2.8.9 WXR On* (software v5.00 or later)
The WXR On discrete output is provided when WXR is active. The discrete is driven low (active) when
the WXR is commanded on by the GDU. Otherwise, it is open.
4.2.8.10 Radar Altimeter Self Test Out* (software v5.00 or later)
The Radar Altimeter Self Test Out discrete is provided when the radar altimeter is active. If the discrete is
configured for an ARINC 708 WXR, the discrete is driven low (active) when the radar altimeter self test is
commanded by the GDU. Otherwise, it is open.
4.2.8.11 GPS 1/2 Source* (software v5.01 or later)
The GPS 1/2 Source discrete is driven low when GPS 2 data is being used by the GDU 620. It is open
when GPS 1 data is being used.
4.2.8.12 HDG/CRS Datum Valid* (software v6.10 or later)
The HDG/CRS Datum Valid discrete is driven low whenever heading or GPS track (from any available
GPS) is valid. Otherwise, it is open.
4.2.8.13 On-Ground* (software v6.10 or later)
The On-Ground discrete is driven low whenever the system determines that it is on the ground. It is open
whenever the system determines that it is airborne, or the air/ground status is unknown.
4.2.8.14 Airspeed Discrete Out 1-5* (software v6.10 or later)
Five configurable Airspeed Discrete outputs are provided. These are driven low when the airspeed being
displayed on the GDU 620 is less than or greater than a configured airspeed. Otherwise, it is open. Refer to

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 4-18
section 5.5.1.12 for configuration instructions.
4.2.8.15 ETM Trend* (software v6.10 or later)
The ETM Trend discrete is driven low whenever an ETM trend or capture is being commanded by the Pratt
& Whitney (Altair Avionics) ADAS+ aircraft data acquisition system.
4.2.9 ADF Input
The GDU 620 has one interface that allows ADF bearing to be displayed on the HSI as a bearing pointer.
This input allows ADFs, that provide a DC SIN/COS output, to be connected to the GDU 620. No ability
to control the ADF is provided in the GDU 620. The GDU 620 can optionally accept a valid (Superflag)
signal from the ADF receiver. Refer to section 4.2.7.7.
The ADF input is automatically configured for proper operation by the type of ADF specified. Refer to
section 5.5.5.1.

Table 4-15 ADF Input

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O
ADF X/COS IN P6201 17 In
ADF Y/SIN IN P6201 18 In
ADF DC REF IN P6201 36 In

4.2.10 ARINC 453/708 Inputs (software v5.00 or later)

The GDU 620 has two ARINC 453/708 inputs. These inputs are used to take in weather radar data
compliant with ARINC 708A.

Table 4-16 ARINC 453/708 Inputs

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O
ARINC 708/453 IN 1A P6203 14 In
ARINC 708/453 IN 1 TERM A P6203 15 In
ARINC 708/453 IN 2A P6203 16 In
ARINC 708/453 IN 2 TERM A P6203 17 In
ARINC 708/453 IN 1B P6203 36 In
ARINC 708/453 IN 1 TERM B P6203 37 In
ARINC 708/453 IN 2B P6203 38 In
ARINC 708/453 IN 2 TERM B P6203 39 In

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 4-19
4.2.11 Time Mark Input
The GDU 620 has two differential time mark inputs, one provided for each GPS input. These inputs
comply with Attachment 8 of ARINC 743A. These are used to accurately determine the time of GPS
messages that are sent to the GRS 77 AHRS.

Table 4-17 Time Mark Inputs

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O
TIME MARK IN 1A P6202 40 In
TIME MARK IN 1B P6202 41 In
TIME MARK IN 2A P6202 42 In
TIME MARK IN 2B P6202 43 In

4.2.12 Message Audio Output

The GDU 620 has one 500 ohm audio output that can be connected to an audio panel to provide audible
messages to the pilot. If TAWS is enabled, the audible alerts include the altitude alerter chimes and internal
SVT-Terrain/TAWS aurals.
The message audio has a discrete input associated with it. This discrete can be used to suppress non-TAWS
aural messages. Refer to section 4.2.7.1 for additional details.

Table 4-18 Message Audio Output

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O
AUDIO OUT HI P6201 28 Out
AUDIO OUT LO P6201 29 Out

4.2.13 Composite Video Inputs (software v4.00 or later)

The GDU 620 has two composite video inputs.

Table 4-19 Composite Video Inputs

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O
COMPOSITE VIDEO IN 1 P6201 1 In
COMPOSITE VIDEO IN 2 P6201 20 In

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 4-20
5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND CHECKOUT
5.1 Post Installation Power Check ..........................................................................................................5-2
5.2 GDU 620 Software Loading .............................................................................................................5-2
5.3 Initial Configuration of the GDU 620...............................................................................................5-3
5.4 GDU 620 System Status Page (PFD Side) .......................................................................................5-4
5.4.1 System ID...................................................................................................................................5-5
5.5 GDU 620 System Setup and Checkout Pages (MFD Side) ..............................................................5-6
5.5.1 System Page Group ....................................................................................................................5-8
5.5.2 AHRS Page Group ...................................................................................................................5-59
5.5.3 ADC Page Group .....................................................................................................................5-66
5.5.4 GDL Page Group (Available only when GDL 69 data link present) .......................................5-71
5.5.5 FCS Page Group (Flight Control System)................................................................................5-73
5.5.6 GAD Page Group (software v3.00 or later) .............................................................................5-82
5.5.7 WXR Group (software v3.00 or later) .....................................................................................5-87
5.5.8 LTNG Group ............................................................................................................................5-95
5.5.9 Traffic Page Group (software v4.00 or later) ...........................................................................5-98
5.5.10 GSR Group .............................................................................................................................5-103
5.5.11 Engine Instrument System (EIS) Page Group........................................................................5-105
5.5.12 DIAG Page Group ..................................................................................................................5-111

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-1
5.1 Post Installation Power Check
Check that all cables are properly secured and shields are connected to the shield block of the connector.
Check the movement of the flight and engine controls to verify that there is no interference. Ensure wiring
is installed in accordance with AC 43.13-1B, Chapter 11. Verify that the power and ground leads are
correct.
5.2 GDU 620 Software Loading

NOTE
It is recommended to use an SD card with a capacity of 2 GB or smaller for loading GDU
software. If a card larger than 2 GB is used, a version mismatch error will display after
files have finished loading. Load software again after cycling power on the GDU or the
update may be incomplete.

Prior to using the GDU 620 display, its software should be updated as follows:
1. Pull the GDU circuit breaker.
2. Insert the applicable GDU 620 Main Loader Card into the top card slot. Refer to table 2-3 for the
correct loader card part number.
3. While holding the ENT key, close the GDU circuit breaker.
4. When “INITIALIZING SYSTEM” displays, release the ENT key.
5. When prompted to update system files, press the ENT key.
6. When the update is finished, press any soft key. The GDU powers up in configuration mode.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-2
5.3 Initial Configuration of the GDU 620

NOTE
To access all of the configuration screens shown herein, an Installer Unlock Card
P/N 010-00769-60 must be inserted in the bottom card slot prior to applying power to the
GDU 620.
As part of the initial configuration, the GDU 620 functions must be enabled/disabled as desired, external
data sources must be configured, and miscellaneous options must be set up. To do this, an Installer Unlock
Card (P/N 010-00769-60) must be inserted in the bottom slot, and the unit must be started in configuration
mode by pressing and holding the ENT key while applying power.
When in configuration mode the PFD has only one page that is used to display status and product
information. The MFD has multiple pages that are used to configure and checkout the installation of the
GDU 620.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-3
5.4 GDU 620 System Status Page (PFD Side)
This page is used as information reference only. It is not configurable.
G500 G600

G500H
Figure 5-1 PFD Screens of GDU 620

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-4
DEVICES ONLINE Window
 Green Light: The device is configured as present and valid data is being received as expected from
the device.
 Red Light: The device is configured as present and bad/invalid data is being received from the
device (e.g., parity/checksum error).
 No Light (Black): The device is configured as present and no data is being received from the
device.
LRU and DATA Windows
To navigate within the LRU window, push the PFD knob (knob on PFD side) to activate the cursor. Turn
the PFD knob to select an LRU. Once an LRU is highlighted, information about it will be displayed in the
DATA window.
5.4.1 System ID
The System ID (SYS ID) for the particular installation is displayed in the DATA window when the GDU is
selected in the LRU window.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-5
5.5 GDU 620 System Setup and Checkout Pages (MFD Side)

NOTE
Figure 5-2 shows all available configuration pages. Not all pages will appear in a typical
installation. Only pages for systems configured as “Present” will be displayed.

The MFD knob (MFD side dual concentric knob) is the primary control for the GDU 620 MFD. Operation
is similar to the Garmin 400/500 Series units.
 To change page groups and cycle through different configuration screens, rotate the outer MFD
knob. The inner MFD knob will change pages within the group.
 To activate the cursor for a page, press the inner MFD knob directly in (as one would push a
regular key).
 To cycle the cursor through different data fields, rotate the outer MFD knob.
 To change the contents of a highlighted data field, rotate the inner MFD knob. This action either
brings up a menu with options for a particular field, or in some cases, allows the operator to enter
data for the field.
 To confirm a selection, press the ENT key.
 To cancel a selection, press the inner MFD knob in or press the CLR key. Pressing the inner MFD
knob in again will deactivate the cursor.
Some configuration pages have commands or selections that are activated by the GDU 620 soft keys. If a
soft key is associated with a command, then that command will be displayed directly above the key. A
disabled soft key shows a command that is unavailable. A highlighted soft key shows the current active
selection.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-6
 Figure 5-2 Configuration Page Navigation
1. System Configuration Page 8. Audio Alert Configuration Page
2. Airframe Configuration Page 9. ARINC Port Config Page
3. Airspeed Configuration Page 10. RS Port Config Page
4. Lighting Configuration Page 11. Terrain/TAWS-B/SVT/Terrain-HSVT Setup Page
5. Manifest Configuration Page 12. Video Configuration Page
6. Software Upload Page 13. Discrete Configuration Page
7. Feature Configuration Page 14. Miscellaneous GDU Configuration Page

1. AHRS/Air Data Input Page

2. AHRS Configuration Page
3. AHRS/GMU Calibration Page

1. Air Data Configuration Page/ADC Configuration Page [1]

2. Air Data Configuration [2]

1. GDL 69 Page

1. Autopilot Configuration Page

2. Flight Director Page
3. Flight Director Cal Page
4. Autopilot Test Page

1. GAD 43 Page
2. GAD 43e Page
3. GAD 43e Calibration Page

1. GWX Weather Radar Page

or
ARINC 708 Weather Radar Page

1.Stormscope Page
2. Stormscope Data Page

1. GTS Status and Configuration Page

2. GTS Port Configuration

1.Iridium Configuration Page

2. Position Reporting Page

1. EIS Configuration Page

2. Configuration Upload Page
3. Gauge Configuration Page
4. GEA Configuration Page
5. Exceedance Log Page

1. Port Monitoring Page

2. Input Monitoring Page
3. Outputs Page
4. Engine Data Page
5. GEA Status Page
6. Error Log Page

Note:
[1] Page name dependent on whether GSU 75 or GDC 74 is configured for ADC.
[2] G500H configured with a GSU 75 for ADC will have a second Air Data configuration page.
[3] Depending on which autopilot is configured, these pages may not display.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-7
5.5.1 System Page Group
Navigation of the different pages in the System Page Group is done by rotating the inner MFD knob.
5.5.1.1 System Configuration Page
This page allows the installers to select which LRUs are present and not present in a given installation.

Figure 5-3 System Configuration Page

CDU IDENTIFICATION Window
If configured for USE DISCRETE, the CDI System ID Program Pin (refer to section 4.2.7.2) is used. For
any other setting, the CDI System ID Program Pin (P6201-4) is ignored.
CDU System ID: specifies how the GDU determines if it is GDU #1, #2, or #3.
Selections: Use Discrete, GDU 1, GDU 2, GDU 3
Activate the cursor, select the system using the outer MFD knob, and then press the ENT key. This will
activate or deactivate the highlighted system. For activated systems, use the inner knob to select the
appropriate LRU from the dropdown TYPE menu, and then press the ENT key to select the LRU.
Continue to activate or deactivate each LRU, as required.
A green light means that the LRU is configured as present. No light (black) means that the LRU is
configured as not present. (The TYPE field will be blank in this case.)

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-8
INTERFACING SYSTEMS Window
Cross-side GDU
Selections: GDU 620, GDU 620x2
(GDU 620x2 is for three GDU 620 installations)
 AHRS
Selections: GRS 77, GSU 75, GRS 79
 ADC
Selections: GDC 74, GSU 75, GDC 72
 GPS1
Selections: GPS 400W, GNC 420W, GNS 430W, GNS 480, GPS 500W, GNS 530W
 GPS2
Selections: GPS 400W, GNC 420W, GNS 430W, GNS 480, GPS 500W, GNS 530W

NOTE
The SL30 can only be configured as NAV1 or NAV2, and not for both NAV receivers
simultaneously.

 NAV1
Selections: GNS 430W, GNS 480, GNS 530W, SL30, GAD 43e, CROSSFILL
 NAV2
Selections: GNS 430W, GNS 480, GNS 530W, SL30, GAD 43e, CROSSFILL (Only available if
NAV1 has been activated.)
 ADF
Selections: KDF 806/KFS 586, KR 87, RCR-650, ADF-60B, GAD 43e (GDU 1 only), GAD 43e
CROSSFILL (GDU 2 and GDU 3 only)
 +Superflag: Select superflag if the ADF provides a superflag output indicating that the bearing is
valid; otherwise, leave this unselected.
 Traffic/ADS-B
Selections: SkyWatch, SkyWatch HP, KTA 870, KTA 970, GTX 330,
Avidyne/Ryan TAS, GTS 800, GTS 820, GTS 850, CROSSFILL, GDL 88, GTS ADS-B,
GTX ADS-B #1, GTX ADS-B #2, GNX 375 #1, GNX 375 #2

NOTE
GNX 375 #1 and GNX 375 #2 selections display after the GNX 375 is connected.
 +External Control: Select external control if there is an external controller for the traffic
system. The +External Control option is only available when the traffic/ADS-B source is set to
Skywatch, Skywatch HP, KTA 870, KTA 970, GTX 330, GTS 800, GTS 820, GTS 850, or
GTS ADS-B. The GDU 620 will not be able to control the traffic system if this item is
selected.
Selections: Enable, Disable
 +TAS/TCAS/TCAD: Select TAS/TCAS/TCAD if there is an external controller for the
traffic system. The +TAS/TCAS/TCAD option is only available when the traffic/ADS-B
source is set to GDL 88, GTX ADS-B #1, or GTX ADS-B #2. The GDU 620 will not be able
to control the traffic system if this item is selected.
Selections: A429 TAS/TCAS, TCAD, Garmin GTS

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-9
  Data Link
Selections: GDL 69, GDL 69A
 Weather Radar
Selections: GWX 68, GWX 70, GWX 75, ART-2000, RS-181A, RS-811A
This option is only displayed if Weather Radar is enabled on the Feature Configuration page.
Refer to section 5.5.1.6 for additional details.
 Adapter
Selections: GAD 43, GAD 43e (GDU 1 only), GAD 43e CROSSFILL (GDU 2 only)
This option is only displayed if GAD 43 Adapter is enabled on the Feature Configuration page.
Refer to section 5.5.1.6 for additional details.
 Iridium
Selections: GSR 56 is the only selection
 Radar Altimeter
Selections: ARINC 429, ARINC 429 No Test, GAD 43e, GAD 43e No Test, CROSSFILL,
CROSSFILL No Test
 Engine Indication
Selections: GEA 1, GEA 2, Dual GEA
This option only available for G500H models. Refer to section 5.5.11 for additional details.
 Lightning Sensor
Selections: Stormscope is the only selection.
Deactivate the cursor. Use the inner knob to move to the next page.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-10
5.5.1.2 Airframe Configuration Page

NOTE
All PFD settings must match what is in the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) or the Pilot’s
Operating Handbook (POH).

This page allows the installer to configure the PFD airspeed, altitude and vertical speed tape scales and
appearance, MFD display, GDL69 Audio, and Altitude Alerter settings.

G500/G600 Systems G500H Systems

Figure 5-4 G500/G600/G500H Airframe Configuration Page
Activate the cursor and use the MFD knob to select the following configurable items.
PFD Window
 DIS. SPD: changes the units displayed on the airspeed tape
Selections: Imperial (SM, MPH), Metric (KM, KPH), Nautical (NM, KT)
 ALT. VS: changes the units displayed on the altitude and vertical speed tapes
Selections: Feet (FT, FPM), Meters (MT, MPS) (Only available if the Metric PFD option is
enabled - G500/G500H only)
 VS TAPE RANGE: changes the range of the vertical speed tape
Selections: +/- 2000 FPM,
+/- 3000 FPM, +/- 4000 FPM Feet selected for ALT. VS), or +/-9 MPS, +/- 12 MPS, +/-30 MPS
(Meters selected for ALT. VS)
Both ALT Tape Range and the IAS Tape Range settings are for information only and are based on the VS
Tape Range setting.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-11
 IAS TAPE: changes the configuration of the IAS tape
Selections: Basic, Advanced
 ADI ROLL POINTER: changes which pointer moves to indicate bank angle
Selections: Ground, Sky
 VS MINIMUM: changes the minimum vertical speed
Selections: OFF, -2000 FPM to -50 FPM in 50 FPM intervals
 VS MAXIMUM: changes the maximum vertical speed
Selections: OFF, 50 FPM to 2000 FPM in 50 FPM intervals
 ATTITUDE SYNC: (G500H only) used to enable or disable the ability to sync the aircraft symbol
to the current pitch attitude
Selections: On, Off
MFD Window
 DIS. SPD: changes the distance and speed units displayed on the MFD
Selections: Imperial (SM,MPH), Metric (KM, KPH), Nautical (NM, KT)
 ALT. VS: changes the altitude and vertical speed units on the MFD
Selections: Feet (FT, FPM), Meters (MT, MPS)
 AIRCRAFT ICON: changes the appearance of the ownship icon on the MFD map
Selections: Generic Airplane, Low-Wing Prop, High-Wing Prop, Kit Plane, Turboprop, Twin-
Engine Prop, Single-Engine Jet, Business Jet, 2-Blade Rotorcraft (G500H), 3-Blade Rotorcraft
(G500H), 4-Blade Rotorcraft (G500H), or Arrow
GDL69 AUDIO Window
 MUTE SPEED: sets the airspeed below which the GDU 620 automatically mutes the GDL 69A
audio
Selections: OFF (automatic muting disabled), 1 to 999 in 1 kt increments
ALERTS Window
 ALT ALERTER: used to enable or disable the type of altitude alerter function of the GDU 620
Selections: Off, Normal, High Perf
Normal: A chime is heard when approaching within 200ft of the selected altitude.
High Perf: A chime is heard when approaching within 1000ft of selected altitude.
 MINIMUMS: used to select type of minimums
Selections: Standard, RA-Only (G500H)
 RA ALERT: used to enable or disable the radar altitude alert
Selections: Disabled, Enabled (G500H)
 HEIGHT: preset to 100 FT or 30 MT (determined by the ALT, VS setting in the PFD Window)

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-12
5.5.1.2A Airspeed Configuration Page (software v5.00 or later)

NOTE
Some airframe manufacturers use the term Vno instead of Vne.

5.5.1.2A.1 Basic Airspeed Configuration Page

NOTE
For rotary wing aircraft, Vyse and Vne (Pwr Off) settings are used to set the marking for
maximum airspeed for engine power off flight. Using Vyse provides a blue mark at this
airspeed. Using Vne (Pwr Off) provides a red/white striped mark at this airspeed. The one
used should match the marking on the original airspeed indicator. Only one of these
settings should be used, and the other setting must be set to OFF.

Figure 5-5 Airspeed Configuration Page – Basic IAS Tape

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-13
AIRSPEEDS (PFD) Window
The Airspeeds (PFD) window is only displayed if the IAS TAPE configuration setting is set to Basic. The
following settings affect the markings on the airspeed tape. Refer to the AFM or POH to determine the
appropriate settings for this installation.
 Vs0: stall speed in landing configuration
 Vs1: stall speed in a specific flight configuration
 Vfe: flap extended speed
 Vno: normal operating speed
 Vne: never exceed speed
 GLIDE: glide speed
 Vr: takeoff rotation speed
 Vx: best angle of climb speed
 Vy: best rate of climb speed
 Vle: landing gear extended speed (set to OFF for fixed gear aircraft)
 Vmca: minimum controllable airspeed for a twin engine aircraft with only one engine operational
(set to OFF for single engine aircraft)
 Vyse:
Fixed wing aircraft: single engine best rate of climb speed for a twin engine aircraft
(set to OFF for single engine aircraft)
Rotary wing aircraft: this is set to the maximum airspeed for engine power off flight when the
existing airspeed indicator is marked with a blue line at this airspeed
 Vne (Pwr Off): this is set to the maximum airspeed for engine power off flight for rotary wing
aircraft when the existing airspeed indicator is marked with a red/white striped line at this airspeed
(set to OFF for fixed wing aircraft)

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-14
5.5.1.2A.2 Advanced Airspeed Configuration Page

Figure 5-6 Airspeed Configuration Page – Advanced IAS Tape

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-15
ARC RANGES Window
The ARC Ranges window is only displayed if the IAS TAPE configuration is set to Advanced. The
following settings affect the color markings on the airspeed tape. Refer to the AFM or POH to determine
the appropriate settings for the installation.
RED (LOW SPEED): Low speed awareness band (ON/OFF only)
WHITE: Flap operating range
HALF WHITE: Flap operating range
WHITE/GREEN: Overlap of white and green arcs
GREEN: Normal operating range
YELLOW: Caution range
Vne/Vmo/Mmo: Maximum airspeed, FXD or VAR. If set to VAR, OVERSPEEDS window is
available
MARKINGS Window
 WHITE TRIANGLE: Maximum speed with approach flaps
 RED BAR: Air minimum control speed
 BLUE BAR: One engine inoperative best rate of climb speed
 RED/WHITE BAR: Maximum speed for any operation
 Vle: Maximum landing gear extended speed
BUGS Window (configurable bugs only in software v6.10 or later)
 GLIDE (default) or Ref: Glide speed
 Vr: Reference airspeed (non-configurable)
 Vx (default) or V1: Best angle-of-climb speed
 Vy (default) or V2: Best rate-of-climb speed

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-16
OVERSPEEDS Window (G500/G600 only)
The OVERSPEEDS window only appears when Vne/Vmo/Mmo is set to VARIABLE (VAR) in the ARC
RANGES (PFD) window. This window allows you to configure the behavior of the airspeed tape on
aircraft that have a barber pole on the original airspeed indicator, a published Mmo, or Vmo/Vne that
varies with altitude.
 Mmo: for aircraft with a published Mmo, this value is set here; otherwise, the Mmo should be set
to OFF
 Mmo Level: for aircraft with a published Mmo, the altitude above which the Mmo limit becomes
effective. If no altitude is published, this value should be left blank
 Vne/Vmo: up to 10 altitude/airspeed points can be specified to specify Vne (IAS) at various
altitudes. The altitude for the first point should be sea level (0 ft), and the altitude of the last point
should be either (i) the altitude where Mmo takes effect, or (ii) the service ceiling of the aircraft
When determining where to place the bottom of the barber pole, the GDU 620 will interpolate between and
beyond the points specified. For this reason, if the airspeed limitation does not continue to decrease after
Mmo altitude, a second ALT/IAS point with a slightly higher altitude, but equal airspeed limit, should be
made so that the Mmo will be the only limiting factor beyond the altitude that Mmo is limiting.
Deactivate the cursor to move to the next page.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-17
5.5.1.3 Lighting Configuration Page

NOTE
If the key lighting is set to track the photocell (the key input source is set to PHOTO), and
the photocell input is above a certain level (daytime), the key backlighting will be switched
off using the additional parameter described below.

NOTE
If the display lighting is set to track the lighting bus (the display input source is set to any
selection other than PHOTO), and the lighting bus control is turned to its minimum
(daytime) setting, the display brightness tracks the GDU 620 unit’s photocell using
additional parameters described below.

The lighting configuration page allows the installer to set parameters that affect the display backlight and
key lighting brightness.

Figure 5-7 Lighting Configuration Page

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-18
The DISPLAY and KEY lighting characteristics are adjusted separately, each with the following fields:
BRIGHTNESS Window
 INPUT SOURCE: this selection determines if the display brightness control is controlled by the
photo cell or the dimming bus input.
Selections: Photo, 14V DC, 28V DC, 5V DC, 5V AC
Source Input Level and Backlight Output Level cannot change current GDU620 screen settings display
information.
MINIMUM LEVEL: sets the minimum brightness of the display. The higher the number, the
brighter the minimum brightness. Display Minimum Level has a range of 5 and higher. Key
Minimum Level has a range of 14 and higher. It is prudent to verify that display and key lighting
characteristics match those of other equipment in the panel under night lighting conditions.
 RESPONSE TIME: sets the speed with which the brightness responds to the input level changes
(bus voltage or ambient light). The higher the number, the slower the display responds. This field
has a range of 2-7.
 SLOPE: sets the sensitivity of the display brightness in proportion to changes in the input level.
The higher the number, the brighter the display is for a given increase in the input level. This field
has a range of 0 to 99.
 OFFSET: adjusts the lighting level up or down for any given input level. This field has a range of
0 to 99. This may be used to match lighting curves with other equipment in the panel.
PHOTOCELL OVERRIDE Window
 PHOTOCELL LEVEL: the ambient light level that the photo cell is reading. This level cannot
be adjusted. It is for informational purposes only.
 KEY BACKLIGHT CUTOFF %: when the photocell input is used to control the lighting of the
bezel keys, this parameter sets the point on the photocell input above which the key lighting is
reduced to the minimum level. This field has a range of 20 to 99.
 PHOTO TRANSITION %: when the lighting bus is turned down below this threshold, the
GDU 620 will then use the photocell to adjust the display brightness and OVERRIDE will be
displayed to the right of the digital value.
 PHOTO SLOPE: when the lighting bus is below the PHOTO TRANSITION %, this sets the
sensitivity of the display brightness in proportion to changes in the photocell input level. The
higher the number, the brighter the display is for a given increase in the input level. This field has
a range of 0 to 99. It is likely that this field should be configured similarly to the SLOPE field in
the Brightness window.
 PHOTO OFFSET: when the lighting bus is below the PHOTO TRANSITION %, this adjusts the
lighting level up or down for any given input level. This field has a range of 0 to 99. This may be
used to match lighting curves with other equipment in the panel. It is likely that this field should be
configured similarly to the OFFSET field in the Brightness window.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-19
5.5.1.4 Manifest Configuration Page

NOTE
An Installer Unlock Card must be used to activate MANIFEST soft key or to edit part
number or version number in Manifest window.

NOTE
When using the MANIFEST soft key, ensure that all configured LRUs show up as online
in the DEVICES ONLINE window before pressing the MANIFEST soft key. The
GDU 620 will only write the information for LRUs that have reported information. If an
LRU has not reported information when the MANIFEST soft key is pressed, that LRU will
automatically be removed from the manifest.
The manifest configuration page allows the installer to enter or verify the software versions used in a
particular installation.

Figure 5-8 Manifest Configuration Page

The manifest consists of software part numbers and versions for various G600 LRUs. When the system is
powered up in normal mode, the GDU 620 verifies the software part numbers and versions reported by the
system LRUs against those listed in the manifest. If they agree, the system operates normally. If they
disagree, communication with that LRU is stopped and a MANIFEST alert is set by the system. Upon first
use, the manifest is empty and this page has no entries.
MANIFEST Soft Key
Pressing this soft key causes all LRU-reported software part numbers and versions to be written to the
manifest. Only certain LRU software versions are allowed to be written to the manifest, depending upon
whether the system is a G500, G600, or G500H. To edit individual items, proceed as described below.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-20
MANIFEST Window
Activate the cursor and select the part number or version number to be edited. Turn the inner knob one
click to begin editing the first digit in the part number or version number. Use the outer knob to select the
digit to be changed, and the inner knob to change the value of the selected digit. When done, press the
ENT key to accept the changes. The cursor automatically moves to the next editable field. When finished,
press the inner knob to deactivate the cursor.
5.5.1.5 Software Upload Page

CAUTION
Pressing the CANCEL soft key to cancel a software load that is in progress can cause the
LRU to stop functioning properly.
The software upload page allows the installer to load software to various LRUs in the system.

Figure 5-9 Software Upload Page

FILE LIST Window
The FILE LIST window lists the software part numbers and versions that are on the currently installed
loader card. This window is selected by pressing the FILE soft key. Rotate the outer knob to select the
software file which is to be loaded.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-21
LRU Window
Based upon the file selected in the FILE window, the LRU window lists the target LRU and the version of
LRU software on the currently installed loader card. This window is selected by pressing the LRU soft
key. Rotate the outer knob to select which LRU is to be loaded (typically there will only be one selection).
When the correct LRU is selected, press the LOAD soft key to begin loading software to that LRU. The
LOAD soft key will be replaced with a CANCEL soft key. Pressing the CANCEL soft key will cause the
LRU software load to be stopped.
SUMMARY Window
The SUMMARY window lists the status of each software load initiated. This window is selected by
pressing the SUMMARY soft key. If there are too many loads to be completely displayed in the
SUMMARY window, the outer knob may be rotated to scroll through and display the status information
for all loads.
UPDATE CFG Soft key
Pressing the UPDT CFG soft key causes all PFD configuration data to be written to the configuration
module.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-22
5.5.1.5.1 LRU Software Loading
The GDU 620 can be used to load software into supported LRUs. To load software into a supported LRU
using the GDU 620, proceed as follows:
1. Ensure that an appropriate software loader card is inserted in the top card slot and the Installer
Unlock Card P/N 010-00769-60 is inserted in the bottom card slot of the GDU 620.
2. Enter the configuration mode by holding the ENT key and restoring or cycling power to the
GDU 620 using the GDU circuit breaker.
3. Navigate to the SOFTWARE UPLOAD page and highlight the LRU software file (the GRS 77 is
shown in the figure below). Ensure that the LRU is displayed in the LRU window as shown.

Figure 5-10 Software Upload Page with LRUs

4. Press the LOAD soft key.
5. Select OK and press the ENT key to acknowledge the following prompt.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-23
 6. The software for the LRU begins to load. Monitor the upload status as it progresses.

7. After the files finish loading, press the ENT key to acknowledge the following prompt.

8. Check the SUMMARY window to ensure the load is COMPLETE.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-24
5.5.1.6 Feature Configuration Page

CAUTION
The Airframe type must be selected before enabling any optional features (G500/G500H
only).

NOTE
For the G600, Synthetic Vision, Weather Radar and GAD 43 Adapter features are enabled
by default in the G600 – no enablement cards are required. For the G500/G500H, these
features are disabled by default and can be enabled using suitable enablement cards.
(Refer to section 2.2.3 for additional information.)

NOTE
For the G600, the TAWS function requires an enablement card to enable the function.
Refer to section 2.2.3 for additional information. For the G500, TAWS is not available.

NOTE
Ensure the configuration module is connected and functioning before enabling optional
features. If the configuration module is not functioning correctly, the features will need to
be re-enabled with a new enablement card.

The feature configuration page allows the installer to enable optional GDU 620 features using an
appropriate enablement card.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-25
 G500 G600

G500H with EIS

Figure 5-11 G500/G600/G500H Feature Configuration Page

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-26
Activate the cursor to select from the following fields.
SYSTEM Window
 Airframe: Determines the type of airframe the system is installed.
Selections: Fixed Wing, Rotary Wing (G500 only)
FEATURES Window
 Charts: Determines the type of charts to be displayed.
Selections: None, FliteCharts, ChartView
ChartView requires an enablement card to enable. Refer to section 2.2.3 for additional
information.
 Altitude Preselect: Used to enable autopilot altitude capture based upon the GDU 620 altitude
bug.
Selections: Disabled, Enabled
Altitude Preselect requires an enablement card to enable. Refer to section 2.2.3 for additional
information.
 Synthetic Vision (software v3.00 or later): Used to enable synthetic vision on the PFD.
Selections: Disabled, Enabled.
 Weather Radar (software v3.00 or later): Used to enable the interface to the weather radar.
Selections: Disabled, GWX, ARINC 708.
The type of weather radar is selected on the System Configuration page. Refer to section 5.5.1.1
for additional information.
 Turbulence Detection: Used to enable detection of turbulence that might contain particulates like
rain or hail (only displayed when GWX is selected).
Selections: Disabled, Enabled.
Turbulence Detection requires an enablement card to enable. Refer to section 2.2.3 for additional
information.
 Ground Clutter Suppression: Used to enable suppression of ground returns due to highly
reflective objects (only displayed when GWX is selected).
Selections: Disabled, Enabled.
Ground Clutter Suppression requires an enablement card to enable. Refer to section 2.2.3 for
additional information.
 GAD 43 Adapter (software v3.00 or later): Used to enable the interface to the GAD 43 adapter
Selections: Disabled, Enabled.
The type of adapter is selected on the System Configuration page. Refer to section 5.5.1.1 for
additional information.
 External Video (software v4.00 or later): Used to enable the interface to an external composite
video source.
Selections: Disabled, Enabled.
When enabled, the format of the video source is selected on the Video Configuration page. Refer
to section 5.5.1.11 for additional information. External video requires an enablement card to
enable. Refer to section 2.2.3 for additional information.
 Rad Alt (A429) (software v5.00 or later): Used to enable the interface to an external radar
altimeter over ARINC 429.
Selections: Disabled, Enabled.
 RVSM (software v5.00 or later): Used to enable Reduced Vertical Separation Minimums
(RVSM) on the PFD.
Selections: Disabled, Enable All.
RVSM requires an enablement card to enable. Refer to section 2.2.3 for additional information.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-27
  Metric PFD (software v6.01 or later – G500/G500H): Used to enable the PFD to display
information in metric values.
 TAWS (software v3.00 or later – G600 only): Used to enable internal TAWS functionality.
Selections: Disabled, Enabled.
 EIS (software v6.01 or later – G500H only): Used to enable EIS display features. Selections:
Disabled, Enabled.
 DFCS 4 (A429) (software v5.02 or later): Used to enable the DFCS 4 output label set from
ARINC 429 Output #2 for use with select autopilots.
Selections: Disabled, Enabled.
 Fast/Slow (A429) (software v6.10 or later): Used to enable a fast/slow indication on the PFD.
Selections: Disabled, Enabled.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-28
5.5.1.7 Audio Alert Configuration Page
The audio alert configuration page allows the installer to adjust the GDU 620 audio output volume level
and play an audio message to evaluate the new volume setting.

Figure 5-12 Audio Alert Configuration Page

Activate the cursor to select from the following:
CONFIG Window
 VOLUME ADJUST: Selects level of volume. Selections: -40dB to 0dB in 1 dB increments.
 VOICE: Selects types of voice. Selections: Male, Female
TEST Window
AUDIO MSG: Selects the stored message to be played.
Move the cursor to the PLAY box and press ENT key to play the message.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-29
5.5.1.8 ARINC Port Configuration Page
The ARINC port configuration page is for displaying port setting information. Configuration is usually not
required since port configuration is automatically set based upon which LRUs are configured as present
(refer to section 5.5.1.1). If required, settings can be changed as described below.

Figure 5-13 ARINC Port Config Page

ARINC 429 INPUT Window
 CHNL: Identifies the ARINC 429 input.
 DATA: Specifies whether or not data is being received on this input:
 Green Light: The device is configured as Present and data is being received on this input.
 No Light (Black): The device is configured as Not Present (OFF is set for INPUT), or the
device is configured as Present and no data is being received on this input.
 SPEED: Sets the ARINC 429 bus speed for this input. Selections: Low, High.
 INPUT: Specified the system associated with this input. The input formats are automatically set to
default values based upon the interfacing systems configured on the System Configuration page.
Refer to section 5.5.1.1. Inputs 2 through 8 may have different systems associated with them.
Available selections for each input are listed in table 5-1.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-30
 Table 5-1 ARINC 429 Input Selections
Input Setting Port Availability Speed Pins
GRS77
Low/
GSU75 AHRS ARINC 429 In #1 P6202-4/21
High
GRS 79
GDC74
Low/
GSU75 ADC ARINC 429 In #2 P6202-5/22
High
GDC 72
Low/
GPS1 ARINC 429 In #3 P6202-6/23
High
Low/
GPS1 Sextant ARINC 429 In #3 P6202-6/23
High
Low/ P6202-7/24, 8/25, 9/26
NAV1 ARINC 429 In #4, 5, 6, 7, or 8
High P6203-4/26, 5/27
Low/ P6202-7/24, 8/25, 9/26
GPS2 ARINC 429 In #4, 5, 6, 7, or 8
High P6203-4/26, 5/27
Low/ P6202-7/24, 8/25, 9/26
GPS2 Sextant ARINC 429 In #4, 5, 6, 7, or 8
High P6203-4/26, 5/27
Low/ P6202-7/24, 8/25, 9/26
NAV2 ARINC 429 In #4, 5, 6, 7, or 8
High P6203-4/26, 5/27
Low/ P6202-7/24, 8/25, 9/26
TRAFFIC ARINC 429 In #4, 5, 6, 7, or 8
High P6203-4/26, 5/27
RADAR Low/ P6202-7/24, 8/25, 9/26
ARINC 429 In #4, 5, 6, 7, or 8
ALTIMETER High P6203-4/26, 5/27
Low/ P6202-7/24, 8/25, 9/26
GAD43e ARINC 429 In #4, 5, 6, 7, or 8
High P6203-4/26, 5/27
Low/ P6202-7/24, 8/25, 9/26
KFC 225 ARINC 429 In #4, 5, 6, 7, or 8
High P6203-4/26, 5/27
Low/ P6202-7/24, 8/25, 9/26
KFC 275/325 ARINC 429 In #4, 5, 6, 7, or 8
High P6203-4/26, 5/27
Low/ P6202-7/24, 8/25, 9/26
Fast/Slow ARINC 429 In #4, 5, 6, 7, or 8
High P6203-4/26, 5/27
Low/ P6202-7/24, 8/25, 9/26
Flight Director ARINC 429 In #4, 5, 6, 7, or 8
High P6203-4/26, 5/27
Low/ P6202-7/24, 8/25, 9/26
GFC 500 ARINC 429 In #4, 5, 6, 7, or 8
High P6203-4/26, 5/27

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-31
ARINC 429 OUTPUT Window

NOTE
Some options may not appear unless configured on or unlocked with a feature enablement
card.

 CHNL: Identifies the ARINC 429 output.

 SPEED: Sets the ARINC 429 bus speed for this output. Selections: Low, High
 OUTPUT: Specifies the data format for this output.
OUT 1: This is always set to GPS NAVIGATOR.
OUT 2: This output provides data to suitable autopilots and is only enabled when the
Autopilot is set to Present.
Selections: Off, Autopilot, DFCS 1, DFCS 2, DFCS 4, DFCS 5, GFC 500
OUT 3: This is a general purpose output that can be used to provide data to other systems.
GFC 500 NAV is only selectable when the autopilot is configured for GFC 500 on the
Autopilot Configuration page.
Selections: Off, General Purpose 1, General Purpose 2, Wx Radar, GFC 500 NAV
OUT 4: This is a general purpose output that can be used to provide data to other systems.
GFC 500 NAV is only selectable when the autopilot is configured for GFC 500 on the
Autopilot Configuration page.
Selections: Off, General Purpose 1, General Purpose 2, Wx Radar, GFC 500 NAV
ARINC 708 INPUT Window
 CHNL: Identifies the ARINC 708 input.
 DATA: Specifies whether or not data is being received on this input:
 Green Light: The device is configured as Present and data is being received on this input.
 No Light (Black): The device is configured as Not Present (OFF is set for INPUT), or the
device is configured as Present and no data is being received on this input.
 INPUT: Specified the system associated with this input. Either input may be set to WX RADAR;
however, WX RADAR may only be configured on one input at a time.
ADDITIONAL SETTINGS Window (GDU 620 software v7.35 or later)
 NUMBER OF GPS UNITS CONNECTED TO A429 OUT 1: This appears in a multi-GDU
installation and is used to determine how many GPS units are connected to receive ARINC 429 #1
output (GPS NAVIGATOR).
Selections: 1, 2
“1” retains the behavior of a unit running software prior to v7.35.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-32
5.5.1.8.1 ARINC 429 Output Formats
The labels transmitted for each particular setting are described below.

Table 5-2 GPS NAVIGATOR Labels (ARINC 429 Output #1 Only)

Label # Data Notes
100P Selected Course 1 [1]
203 Altitude (1013.25 mb)
204 Baro Corrected Altitude
206 Indicated Airspeed
210 True Airspeed
211 Total Air Temperature
212 Vertical Speed
213 Static Air Temperature
314 True Heading
320 Magnetic Heading
[1] This label uses proprietary implementation and should not be used to provide selected
course to external systems.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-33
 Table 5-3 AUTOPILOT (ARINC 429 Output #2 Only)
Label # Data Notes
100 Selected Course
101G Selected Heading
116G Cross Track Distance [1] [2]
117G Vertical Deviation [1] [2]
121 Horizontal Command [3]
312 Ground Speed [1]
314 True Heading
320 Magnetic Heading
326G Lateral Scale Factor [1] [2]
327G Vertical Scale Factor [1] [2]

[1] Labels 116G, 117G, 312, 326G, and 327G received from the currently selected navigator
will be forwarded. If GPS is not selected on the CDI, labels 116G, 117G, 121, 312, 326G,
and 327G from the GPS corresponding to the currently selected side (1 or 2), will be
forwarded.
[2] V2.02 or later.
[3] V6.10 or later. Label 121 received from the currently selected navigator will be forwarded. If
GPS is not selected on the CDI, label 121 will be set to invalid.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-34
 Table 5-4 DFCS 1 (ARINC 429 Output #2 Only)
(software v4.00 or later)
Label # Data Notes
100 Selected Course
101G Selected Heading
121 Horizontal Command [4]
203 Altitude (1013.25 mb)
204 Baro Corrected Altitude
206 Indicated Airspeed
210 True Airspeed
211 Total Air Temperature
212 Vertical Speed
213 Static Air Temperature
312 Ground Speed [1]
313 Track Angle (True) [1]
314 True Heading
320 Magnetic Heading
324 Pitch Angle
325 Roll Angle
326 Body Pitch Rate
327 Body Roll Rate
330 Body Yaw Rate
333 Body Normal Acceleration
371G GA Equipment Identifier [2]
377 Equipment Identifier [3]
[1] Labels 312 and 313 received from the currently selected navigator will be forwarded. If
GPS is not selected on the CDI, labels 121 and 312 from the GPS corresponding to the
currently selected side (1 or 2), will be forwarded.
[2] This label contains a Binary Company ID Code of 24 (Garmin) and an Equipment Hex ID of 25
(EFIS).
[3] This label contains an Equipment Hex ID of 025 (EFIS).
[4] V6.10 or later. Label 121 received from the currently selected navigator will be forwarded. If
GPS is not selected on the CDI, label 121 will be set to invalid.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-35
 Table 5-5 GENERAL PURPOSE 1 (ARINC 429 Output #3 and #4 Only)
(software v4.00 or later)
Label # Data Notes
100 Selected Course [Note 2]
203 Altitude (1013.25 mb)
204 Baro Corrected Altitude
206 Indicated Airspeed
210 True Airspeed
211 Total Air Temperature
212 Vertical Speed
213 Static Air Temperature
312 Ground Speed [1]
313 Track Angle (True) [1]
314 True Heading
320 Magnetic Heading
371G GA Equipment Identifier [2]
377 Equipment Identifier [3]
[1] Labels 312 and 313 received from the currently selected navigator will be forwarded. If
GPS is not selected on the CDI, labels 121 and 312 from the GPS corresponding to the
currently selected side (1 or 2), will be forwarded.
[2] This label contains a Binary Company ID Code of 24 (Garmin) and an Equipment Hex ID of 25
(EFIS).
[3] This label contains an Equipment Hex ID of 025 (EFIS).

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-36
 Table 5-6 GENERAL PURPOSE 2 (ARINC 429 Output #3 and #4 Only)
(Software v7.10 or Later)
Label # Data Notes
100 Selected course
102 Selected Altitude
164 Radio Height
203 Altitude (1013.25 mb)
204 Baro Corrected Altitude
205 Mach
206 Indicated Airspeed
210 True Airspeed
211 Total Air Temperature
212 Vertical Speed
213 Static Air Temperature
234 Selected Baro (HPA)
235 Selected Baro (in Hg)
314 True Heading
320 Magnetic Heading
325 Roll Angle
371G GA Equipment Identifier [1]
377 Equipment Identifier [2]
[1] This label contains a Binary Company ID Code of 24 (Garmin) and an Equipment Hex ID
of 25 (EFIS).
[2] This label contains an Equipment Hex ID of 025 (EFIS).

Table 5-7 WX RADAR (ARINC 429 Output #3 or #4 Only) (Software v5.00 or Later)
Label # Data Notes
270 Radar Control Word #1
271 Radar Control Word #2
273 Vertical Profile Control Word

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-37
 Table 5-8 DFCS 2 (ARINC 429 Output #2 Only)
Label # Data Notes
100 Selected Course
101G Selected Heading
114 Desired Track (True)
116G Cross Track Distance [1]
117G Vertical Deviation [1]
121 Horizontal Command [3]
173 Localizer Deviation [2]
174 Glideslope Deviation [2]
203 Altitude (1013.25 mb) [4]
206 Indicated Airspeed [4]
222 VOR Omnibearing [2]
251G Distance to Go [4]
312 Ground Speed [1]
313 Track Angle (True) [5]
326G Lateral Scale Factor [1]
327G Vertical Scale Factor [1]
[1] Labels 114, 116G, 117G, 312, 326G, and 327G received from the currently selected
navigator will be forwarded.
[2] Labels 173, 174, and 222 received from the currently selected navigator will be forwarded
unchanged. If the navigation receiver is an SL30 (i.e., RS-232), the appropriate data from the
selected navigation receiver will be reformatted into the appropriate ARINC 429 label format.
[3] Software v6.10 or later. Label 121 received from the currently selected navigator will be
forwarded. If GPS is not selected on the CDI, label 121 will be set to invalid.
[4] Software v7.00 or later.
[5] For Label 313, MapMX (RS-232) data from the currently selected navigator reformats into the
appropriate ARINC 429 label format and forwarded.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-38
 Table 5-9 DFCS 4 (ARINC 429 Output #2 Only) (Software v5.02 or Later)
Label # Data Notes
100 Selected Course
101G Selected Heading
121 Horizontal Command [1]
203 Altitude (1013.25 mb)
204 Baro Corrected Altitude
206 Indicated Airspeed
210 True Airspeed
211 Total Air Temperature
212 Vertical Speed
213 Static Air Temperature
312 Ground Speed [4]
313 Track Angle (True) [4]
314 True Heading
320 Magnetic Heading
324 Pitch Angle
325 Roll Angle
326 Body Pitch Rate
327 Body Roll Rate
330 Body Yaw Rate
332 Body Lateral Acceleration
333 Body Normal Acceleration
371G GA Equipment Identifier [2]
377 Equipment Identifier [3]
[1] Label 121 received from the currently selected navigator will be forwarded. If GPS is not
selected on the CDI, label 121 will be set to invalid.
[2] This label contains a Binary Company ID Code of 24 (Garmin) and an Equipment Hex ID of 25
(EFIS).
[3] This label contains an Equipment Hex ID of 025 (EFIS).
[4] Labels 312 and 313 received from the currently selected navigator will be forwarded. If GPS is
not selected on the CDI, labels 121 and 312 from the GPS corresponding to the currently
selected side (1 or 2), will be forwarded.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-39
 Table 5-10 DFCS 5 (ARINC Output #2 Only) (Software v6.10 or Later)
Label # Data Notes
100 Selected Course
101G Selected Heading
116G Cross Track Distance
117G Vertical Deviation
121 Horizontal Command [1]
164 Radio Height
173 Localizer Deviation
174 Glideslope Deviation
202 DME Distance
300 Selected Sensor
301 EFIS Mode Status
320 Magnetic Heading
326G Lateral Scale Factor
327G Vertical Scale Factor
377 Equipment ID [2]
[1] Label 121 received from the currently selected navigator will be forwarded. If GPS is not
selected on the CDI, label 121 will be set to invalid.
[2] This label contains an Equipment Hex ID of 025 (EFIS).

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-40
 Table 5-11 DFCS 6 (ARINC 429 Output #2 Only) (Software v7.20 or Later)

Label # Data Notes

100 Selected Course
101G Selected Heading
102 Selected Altitude
104 Selected Vertical Speed
114 Desired Track (True)
116G Cross Track Distance [1]
117G Vertical Deviation [1]
121 Horizontal Command [3]
147G Magnetic Variation
173 Localizer Deviation [2]
174 Glideslope Deviation [2]
203 Indicated Altitude (1013.25 mb)
204 Baro Corrected Altitude
206 Indicated Airspeed
222 VOR Omnibearing [2]
251G Distance to Go
270 Discrete Out [4]
312 Ground Speed [1]
313 Track Angle (True) [5]
326G Lateral Scale Factor [1]
327G Vertical Scale Factor [1]

[1] Labels 114, 116G, 117G, 312, 326G, and 327G received from the currently selected
navigator will be forwarded.
[2] Labels 173, 174, and 222 received from the currently selected navigator will be forwarded
unchanged. If the navigation receiver is an SL30 (i.e., RS-232), the appropriate data from the
selected navigation receiver will be reformatted into the appropriate ARINC 429 label format.
[3] Label 121 received from the currently selected navigator will be forwarded. If GPS is not
selected on the CDI, label 121 will be set to invalid.
[4] For Label 270, Bit 28 is 1 if Approach is selected, Bit 27 is 1 of GPS is selected. All other bits
are not used.
[5] For Label 313, MapMX (RS-232) data from the currently selected navigator reformats into the
appropriate ARINC 429 label format and forwarded.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-41
 Table 5-12 GFC 500

LABEL DATA Notes

101G Selected heading
102 Selected altitude
104 Selected vertical speed
147G Mag var [1]
150 Time
203 Pressure altitude
206 Indicated airspeed
210 True airspeed
212 Vertical speed
213 OAT
234 Baro setting (mb) [2]
235 Baro setting (in Hg) [3]
240P AGL height [4]
260G Date
310 Latitude
311 Longitude
312 Ground speed
313 Ground track
320 Magnetic heading
324 Pitch
325 Roll
371G Manufacturer ID
377 Equipment ID

[1] Same value used for HSI.

[2] Valid only when GDU set to HPA.
[3] Valid only when GDU set to IN HG.
[4] Formatted like 164 (Radio Height).

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-42
 Table 5-13 GFC 500 NAV

LABEL DATA Notes

034G VLOC frequency
075G Waypoint to/from
100P Selected GPS course [1]
102P VNAV display altitude
104P VNAV vertical speed required
107P VNAV target altitude
110 Selected VLOC course
114 Desired track
115 Waypoint bearing
116G XTK
117G Vertical deviation
121 Roll command
126P VNAV Vertical Deviation
173 Localizer deviation
174 Glideslope deviation
222 VOR bearing
251G Waypoint distance
257P VNAV Time to TOD/BOD
261G GPS discrete flags
275G Navigator discrete flags
322P VNAV Flight Path Angle
326G Lateral scale
327G Vertical scale
351G Distance to destination
371G Manufacturer ID
377 Equipment ID

[1] Indicate CDI source via bits 12-13 (GPS vs VLOC), indicate sensor 1/sensor 2 via bits 14
and 15. Refer to table 5-14 for additional information.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-43
 Table 5-14 CDI Source Bits

Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15

Number of Sensors CDI Source
(GPS) (VLOC) (#1) (#2)
Single VLOC VLOC (1) 0 1 0 0
Single GPS GPS (1) 1 0 0 0
Dual VLOC VLOC 1 0 1 1 0
Dual VLOC VLOC 2 0 1 0 1
Dual GPS GPS 1 1 0 1 0
Dual GPS GPS 2 1 0 0 1

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-44
5.5.1.9 RS Port Configuration Page
The RS port configuration page is for displaying port setting information. Configuration is usually not
required, since port configuration is automatically set, based upon which LRUs are configured as present.
Refer to section 5.5.1.1. Exceptions are noted below.

Figure 5-14 RS Port Config Page

RS-232 Window:
 Green Light: The device is configured as Present and data is being received on this input.
 No Light (Black): The device is configured as Not Present (OFF is set for INPUT), or the
device is configured as Present and no data is being received on this input.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-45
 Table 5-15 RS-232 Port Selection
Input Setting Port Pins
Off, SL30, Stormscope [2] RS-232 CHNL 5 P6202-14/31/48
Off, Stormscope, GSR 56 [2] RS-232 CHNL 6 P6203-6/28/49
Off, Shadin-alt [1], Stormscope [2] RS-232 CHNL 8 P6203-8/30/51
[1] Software v3.00 or later.
[2] Software v7.00 or later.

NOTE
Selecting Shadin-alt will turn off CHNL 8 INPUT and determine whether or not altitude
data is transmitted.

RS-485 Window:
 Green Light: The device is configured as Present and data is being received on this input.
 No Light (Black): The device is configured as Not Present (OFF is set for INPUT), or the device is
configured as Present and no data is being received on this input.
The RS-485 ports are automatically configured to defaults based on system setup, but can be changed.
Each of the RS-485 channels can be set to any of the following:
 S-TEC 55x
 GEA 1
 GEA 2
 ADAS+
The settings cannot be used on more than one channel simultaneously.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-46
5.5.1.10 Terrain/TAWS/SVT/HSVT Setup (software v4.00 or later)

NOTE
Terrain/TAWS/SVT setup is available on the G500 and G600 variants in software v3.00 or
later.

The display page is dependent upon the configuration of the GDU 620. The following sections describe
each display page scenario.
5.5.1.10.1 Terrain Proximity Setup Page (with SVT and TAWS disabled)
The terrain proximity setup page is displayed if both SVT and TAWS features are not enabled.

Figure 5-15 Terrain Proximity Setup Page

TERRAIN ALERTING CONFIGURATION Window
 CONFIGURATION: Displays the current selection for terrain alerting. This configuration is
automatically determined based upon which features are enabled on the Feature Configuration
page.
 EXT TAWS: Specifies whether or not an external TAWS is installed in the aircraft.
Selections: Not Installed, Installed (Garmin), Installed (Other), Installed (HSDB)
AUDIO CONFIGURATION Window
No settings available.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-47
5.5.1.10.2 Terrain-SVT Setup Page (with SVT enabled and TAWS disabled)
(G500 and G600 Only)
The Terrain-SVT setup page displays terrain-SVT setup information when synthetic vision (excluding
TAWS) is enabled using a Synthetic Vision Technology Enablement Card.

Figure 5-16 Terrain-SVT Setup Page

TERRAIN ALERTING CONFIGURATION Window
 CONFIGURATION: Displays the current selection for terrain alerting. This configuration is
automatically determined based upon which features are enabled on the Feature Configuration
page.
 EXTERNAL TAWS: Specifies whether or not an external TAWS is installed in the aircraft.
Selections: Not Installed, Installed (Garmin), Installed (Other), Installed (HSDB)
AUDIO CONFIGURATION Window
 RTC-CAUTION, Selection: Caution, Terrain Terrain
 RTC-WARNING, Selection: Warning Terrain Terrain
 ROC-CAUTION, Selection: Caution, Obstacle Obstacle
 ROC-WARNING, Selection: Warning Obstacle Obstacle
 ITI-CAUTION, Selection: Caution Terrain Terrain
 ITI-WARNING, Selection: Warning Terrain Terrain
 IOI-CAUTION, Selection: Caution Obstacle Obstacle
 IOI-WARNING, Selection: Warning Obstacle Obstacle

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-48
AIRPORT CRITERIA Window
When determining if an airport is nearby, the airport criteria window sets the criteria used by the Terrain
Alerting algorithm. If an airport does not meet all of the specified criteria, it will not be considered a
nearby airport for the purpose of Terrain alerting. Terrain alerting is relaxed at nearby airports to prevent
nuisance alerts when landing.
 RNWY SURFACE: Specifies the options for runway types to consider, when determining if an
airport is nearby.
Selection: Any, Hard Only, Hard/Soft, Water
 MIN LENGTH: Specifies the minimum runway length to consider, when determining if an
airport is nearby.
Selection: 0 to 25000 feet in 1 foot increments

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-49
5.5.1.10.3 TAWS-B Setup Page (with TAWS enabled) (G500 and G600 Only)
The TAWS-B setup page displays TAWS-B setup information when TAWS is enabled using a TAWS
Enablement Card.

Figure 5-17 TAWS-B Setup Page

TERRAIN ALERTING CONFIGURATION Window
CONFIGURATION, displays the current selection for terrain alerting. This configuration is
automatically determined based upon which features are enabled on the Feature Configuration
page.
AUDIO CONFIGURATION Window
 RTC-CAUTION, Selections: Caution, Terrain (2x) or Terrain Ahead (2x)
 RTC-WARNING, Selections: Terrain (2x), Pull-Up or Terrain Ahead, Pull-Up (2x)
 ROC-CAUTION, Selections: Caution, Obstacle (2x) or Obstacle Ahead (2x)
 ROC-WARNING, Selections: Obstacle (2x), Pull Up (2x) or Obstacle Ahead, Pull-Up (2x)
 ITI-CAUTION, Selections: Terrain Ahead (2x) or Caution, Terrain (2x)
 ITI-WARNING, Selections: Terrain Ahead, Pull-Up (2x) or Terrain (2x), Pull-Up (2x)
 IOI-CAUTION, Selections: Obstacle Ahead (2x) or Caution, Obstacle (2x)
 IOI-WARNING, Selections: Obstacle Ahead, Pull-Up (2x) or Obstacle (2x), Pull-Up (2x)
 PDA-CAUTION, Selection: Too Low – Terrain
 NCR-CAUTION, Selections: Don’t Sink or Too Low – Terrain
 EDR-CAUTION, Selection: Sink Rate
 EDR-WARNING, Selection: Pull-Up
 VCO-500, Selection: Five Hundred

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-50
AIRPORT CRITERIA Window
When determining if an airport is nearby, the airport criteria window sets the criteria used by the TAWS
Alerting algorithm. If an airport does not meet all of the specified criteria, it will not be considered a
nearby airport for the purpose of TAWS alerting. TAWS alerting is relaxed at nearby airports to prevent
nuisance alerts when landing.
 RNWY SURFACE: Specifies the options for runway types to consider, when determining if an
airport is nearby.
Selection: Any, Hard Only, Hard/Soft, Water
 MIN LENGTH: Specifies the minimum runway length to consider, when determining if an
airport is nearby.
Selection: 0 to 25000 feet in 1 foot increments

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-51
5.5.1.10.4 Terrain-HSVT Setup (G500H Only)
The terrain HSVT setup page displays Terrain-HSVT setup information when SVT is enabled using a
Helicopter SVT Enablement Card.

Figure 5-18 Terrain-HSVT Setup Page

TERRAIN ALERTING CONFIGURATION Window
 CONFIGURATION, displays the current selection for terrain alerting. This configuration is
automatically determined based upon which features are enabled on the Feature Configuration
page.
 EXT TAWS, specifies whether or not an external TAWS is installed in the aircraft.
Selections: Not Installed, Installed (Garmin), Installed (Other), Installed (HSDB)
AUDIO CONFIGURATION Window
 RTC-CAUTION, Selections: Caution Terrain Terrain
 RTC-WARNING, Selections: Warning Terrain Terrain
 ROC-CAUTION, Selections: Caution Obstacle Obstacle
 ROC-WARNING, Selections: Warning Obstacle Obstacle
 ITI-CAUTION, Selections: Caution Terrain Terrain
 ITI-WARNING, Selections: Warning Terrain Terrain
 IOI-CAUTION, Selections: Caution Obstacle Obstacle
 IOI-WARNING, Selections: Warning Obstacle Obstacle

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-52
AIRPORT CRITERIA Window
When determining if an airport is nearby, the airport criteria window sets the criteria used by the HSVT
Alerting algorithm. If an airport does not meet all of the specified criteria, it will never be considered a
nearby airport for the purpose of HSVT alerting. HSVT alerting is relaxed at nearby airports to prevent
nuisance alerts when landing.
 RNWY SURFACE: Specifies the options for runway types to consider when determining if an
airport is nearby.
Selection: Any, Hard Only, Hard/Soft, Water
 MIN LENGTH: Specifies the minimum runway length to consider when determining if an airport
is nearby.
Selection: 0 to 25000 feet in 1 foot increments

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-53
5.5.1.11 Video Configuration Page (software v4.00 or later)

NOTE
The SETUP soft key must be pressed to allow adjustment of the following parameters.

The video configuration page is used to configure the interface to an optional video camera.

Figure 5-19 Video Configuration Page

CONFIGURATION Window
 SOURCE, specifies which video input is selected for configuration and viewing. The source is
selected by pressing the VIDEO 1 or VIDEO 2 soft key.
 CONFIGURED: Specifies if Video 1 or Video 2 source is present.
Selections: Yes, No
 FORMAT: Specifies the format of the incoming composite video.
Selections: Auto, NTSC, PAL
 ROTATION: Specifies the amount of how much the incoming video will be rotated when
displayed.
Selections: 0°, 90°, 180°, 270°
 BRIGHTNESS: Is used to adjust the brightness of the displayed video.
Selections: 0% to 100%. in 1% increments
 CONTRAST: Is used to adjust the contrast of the displayed video.
Selections: 0% to 100% in 1% increments
 SATURATION: Is used to adjust the saturation (color intensity) of the displayed video.
Selections: 0% to 100% in 1% increments

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-54
VIDEO Window
The window at the top of the page displays the composite video that is being received on the selected video
input. The RNG up and down keys can be used to adjust the zoom scale used when displaying the video.
The inner MFD knob may be pressed and inner and outer MFD knobs can be turned to pan up/down and
left/right across the video image.
5.5.1.12 Discrete Configuration Page (software v5.00 or later)
The discrete configuration page allows the discrete output pin functions to be configured for a specific
function. The correct pin function must be selected based upon the systems that are wired to each pin
output. Note that once a function is selected for a pin output, the same function cannot be selected for
another pin output. Each function is mutually exclusive. To restore each discrete output to its default
function, press the DEFAULTS soft key and acknowledge the prompt that is displayed. Refer to section
4.2.8. Table 5-16 and the interconnect diagrams in appendix C, show the default discrete output pin
functions. Refer to table 5.5.1.13 for discrete configuration selections.

Table 5-16 Default Discrete Output Configuration

Pin # Output Function
P6201-23 TAWS Audio Active Out*
P6201-24 Altitude Capture*
P6201-25 A/P Backcourse*
P6201-26 TIS/TAS Standby*
P6201-27 TAS Test*
P6203-44 GPS Annunciate*
P6203-45 GPS Select*
P6203-46 ILS/GPS Approach*
P6203-47 GSR 56 Remote Power*
An asterisk (*) following a signal name denotes that the signal is an Active-Low, requiring a ground to
activate.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-55
 Figure 5-20 Discrete Configuration Page
DISCRETE OUTPUTS Window
Table 5-17 Discrete Configuration Selections

Discrete Output Function Selections

Off TAWS Audio Active Out Altitude Capture
A/P Backcourse TIS/TAS Standby TAS Test
GPS Annunciate GPS Select ILS/GPS Approach
GSR 56 Remote Power Radar Altimeter Self Test Out WX Radar On
GPS 1/2 Source Airspeed Discrete Out 1 Airspeed Discrete Out 2
Airspeed Discrete Out 3 Airspeed Discrete Out 4 Airspeed Discrete Out 5
HDG/CRS Datum Valid On-Ground ETM Trend
Radar Altimeter Self Test Out 2

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-56
AIRSPEED DISCRETE OUTPUTS Window
 ACTIVE CONDITION: Used to set the condition (LESS THAN or GREATER THAN) for
which the corresponding Airspeed Discrete output is active (ground). This window is only
displayed if at least one discrete output is configured as an Airspeed Discrete Output.
Selections: Less Than, Greater Than
 VALUE: Used to set the airspeed associated with the discrete output.
Selections: Vne/Vmo/MMo, or 0 to 999 kts in 1 kt increments
 NO DATA STATE: Describes the state of the discrete output when valid air data is not being
received (ACTIVE (ground) or INACTIVE (open)).
Selections: Active, Inactive
DISCRETE INPUTS Window

Table 5-18 Discrete Input Function Selections

Discrete Input Function Selections

OFF EIS COMPOSITE IN* GPSS ENABLE*
RA MUTE*

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-57
5.5.1.13 Miscellaneous GDU Configuration Page
In multiple GDU installations, this page allows the AHRS and Air Data cross comparison monitors to be
turned on or off. This page allows the Database Sync to be configured. In previous software versions, this
page was named Multiple GDU Configuration.

Figure 5-21 Miscellaneous GDU Configuration Page

Config Window
AHRS/AIR DATA MONITOR: Specifies whether or not the AHRS and Air Data cross comparison
monitors are turned on or off (G500H software v6.10 or later and G500/600 software v7.35 or later).
Selections: Disabled, Enabled
DATABASE SYNC: Specifies whether the Database Sync is disabled, enabled, or pilot selectable.
Selections: Disabled, Enabled, Pilot Selectable.
NAV DEVIATION DISPLAY FILTERING: Specifies whether the GDU filters the VOR and ILS
lateral and vertical deviations. Selections: Enabled, Disabled.
CDI & BARO SYNC (Software v7.35 or Later): Specifies whether the CDI Source and Baro
Correction pilot settings are synced between GDU in multi-GDU installations.
Selections: Always On, Pilot Selectable.
Selecting “Pilot Selectable” retains the behavior of a unit running software before v7.35.
CDI SYNC WITH NAVIGATOR (Software v7.35 or Later): Specifies whether the GDU CDI
Source is synced with the selected navigator in multi-GDU installations.
Selections: Disabled, Enabled
Selecting “Disabled” retains the behavior of a unit running software before v7.35.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-58
5.5.2 AHRS Page Group
5.5.2.1 AHRS/Air Data Input Page
The AHRS/air data input page is used to monitor inputs from the GRS 77, GSU 75, or GRS 79. There are
no selectable items on this page. The parameters are as described below.

Figure 5-22 AHRS/Air Data Input Page

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-59
AHRS Window
 HDG: Magnetic heading value input from AHRS, expressed in degrees.
 ROLL: Roll value input from AHRS, expressed in degrees.
 PTCH: Pitch value input from AHRS, expressed in degrees.
 YAW RATE: Yaw rate value input from AHRS, expressed in degrees/sec.
 ROLL RATE: Roll rate value input from AHRS, expressed in degrees/sec.
 PITCH RATE: Pitch rate value input from AHRS, expressed in degrees/sec.
 X ACC: X Axis acceleration value, expressed in m/s².
 Y ACC: Y Axis acceleration value, expressed in m/s².
 Z ACC: Z Axis acceleration value, expressed in m/s².
 VERT ACC: Vertical acceleration value, expressed in m/s².
AIR DATA Window
 SAT: Static Air Temperature measurement input from ADC, expressed in degrees Centigrade.
 TAT: Total Air Temperature measurement input from ADC, expressed in degrees Centigrade.
 IAS: Indicated Air Speed measurement input from ADC, expressed in knots.
 TAS: True Air Speed measurement input from ADC, expressed in knots.
 B ALT: Barometric corrected altitude input from ADC, expressed in feet.
 D ALT: Density altitude input from ADC, expressed in feet.
 P ALT: Pressure altitude input from ADC, expressed in feet.
 STATIC PRESS: Static pressure from ADC, expressed in inches.
 DIFF PRESS: Differential pressure from ADC, expressed in inches.
 MACH: Mach number
 VERT SPD: Vertical speed from ADC, expressed in feet per minute.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-60
5.5.2.2 AHRS Configuration

NOTE
When initially turned to the AHRS Configuration page, “updating” will temporarily
display to the right of ACTIVE. This indicates the configuration is being received from the
AHRS.

NOTE
A predefined configuration may be loaded from the SOFTWARE UPLOAD page in the
SYS group.

NOTE
BINARY DATA MISMATCH will display if a CRC mismatch exists between the GDU and
the GSU, even in the non-displayed parameters.

NOTE
MISSING GDU STANDARD CONFIG DATA will display in the SET column when the
GDU uses the Standard Configuration and configuration data is unavailable.

NOTE
MISSING GDU SPECIAL CONFIG DATA will display in the SET column when the GDU
uses the Special Configuration and configuration data is unavailable.

NOTE
Part number, version, and description shown will vary depending on whether the standard
or special config data is loaded.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-61
 Figure 5-23 AHRS Configuration Page

The AHRS configuration page is displayed if the AHRS is configured for the GSU 75 or GRS 79.
The AHRS configuration page allows installers to do the following:
 Load the configuration from the GDU to the GSU 75/GRS 79.
 Transfer the configuration from the GSU 75/GRS 79 to the GDU.
There are two types of configurations that can be stored in the GDU. The GDU will use the standard
configuration, unless a special configuration has been loaded to it. If a special configuration has been
loaded, “Special Configuration” will display at the bottom of the AHRS window.
Standard Configuration
Generated from the default AHRS configuration file included with GDU software v7.10 or later, and the
following GDU configuration settings:
 Airframe Type (Feature Configuration Page)
 AHRS and ADC Types (System Configuration Page)
 Installer modifiable AHRS settings (AHRS Configuration Page)
The following fields are changeable:
 Mount Orient
Selections: Right Wing, Left Wing, Forward, Aft
 Mag Location
Selections: May flex, Will not flex

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-62
Special Configuration
Generated from:
A predefined configuration loaded from the SOFTWARE UPLOAD page in SYS group.
Pressing the ACTV>SET soft key, which writes the configuration settings that are stored in the
AHRS to the GDU.
AHRS Window:
 The SET column is the configuration that is stored in the GDU.
 The ACTIVE column is the configuration that is stored in the GSU 75/GRS 79.
Part Number: Configuration part number
Version: Configuration version number
Description: Displays a description of the configuration
Mount Orient: Direction of the GSU 75/GRS 79 connector
MAG Location: Location where the magnetometer is mounted
LOCATIONS (INCHES) Window (Software v7.35 and Later):
Enter the Fuselage Station (STA), Butt Line (BL), Water Line (WL) with a value between -999 and +999
in 1 inch increments for AHRS, GPS1 antenna, GPS2 antenna, and CG.The SET>ACTV soft key writes
the configuration settings that are stored in the GDU to the AHRS. The soft key will only be active when
there is a configuration in the GDU to load into the AHRS.
The ACTV>SET soft key writes the configuration settings that are stored in the AHRS to the GDU.
The DWNLD CFG soft key downloads GDU configuration, AHRS configuration, and calibration files to
the top SD card for troubleshooting.
The REVERT soft key reverts the GDU current configuration to the Standard Configuration.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-63
5.5.2.3 AHRS/GMU Calibration
The AHRS/GMU calibration page allows installers to calibrate and test the AHRS installation.

Figure 5-24 AHRS/GMU Calibration Page

SELECT PROCEDURE Window
Activate the cursor to select the following procedures:
1. Pitch/Roll Offset
2. Magnetometer
3. Heading Offset
4. Engine Run-Up Test
5. Mag Interference Test

NOTE
When a GSU 75 is installed with a GDU 620 running software v7.12, a Mag Interference
Test Tool, P/N 006-B1167-30 is required in order to perform the Magnetometer
Interference Test. The tool is downloaded from Garmin’s Dealer Resource Center and
loaded onto an SD card. Before applying power to the unit, insert the SD card into the top
card slot of the GDU 620. For additional information refer to Installation Bulletin 1666.
Units running software v7.20 or later do not need to use separate software to conduct the
test.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-64
MONITOR Window
HEADING: Shows the magnetic heading from the AHRS.
COMMUNICATION STATUS Window
1. GPS: Shows status of GPS inputs from the GDU to AHRS.
2. AIR DATA: Shows status of the air data input from ADC to AHRS.
3. MAGNETOMETER: Shows status of communication between AHRS and GMU 44.
BEFORE CALIBRATION Window
This window shows the specific steps an installer needs to take in order to perform each of the calibration
procedures. To begin calibration and to confirm that each step has been completed, press the ENT key.
The CALIBRATE command cannot be selected UNTIL each step is performed and checked by the
installer.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-65
5.5.3 ADC Page Group
5.5.3.1 Air Data Configuration Page (GDC 74 only)

NOTE
The Heli setting is only available with GDC 74( ) software v3.06 or later.
The Air Data Configuration page allows the installers to configure the GDC 74( ).

G500/G600 without RVSM G500/G600 with RVSM

G500H
Figure 5-25 G500/G600/G500H ADC Configuration Page

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-66
CONFIGURATION Window
 OAT: Specifies the type of OAT probe connected to the GDC 74( ).
Selections: None, GTP 59, Goodrich 102AU1AG, Harco 100723-2, ARINC TAT Input
 AIRCRAFT
Specifies the type of aircraft if RVSM is enabled.
Selections: Manual Entry, Aircraft Type
(G500/G600 with RVSM enabled only)
Specifies the type of aircraft.
Selections: Manual Entry, Heli. (G500H only)
FILTERING TIME CONSTANTS Window (G500H only)
 GDU AIRSPEED: Specifies the filter time constants for the filtering that is applied to the
airspeed tape display on the GDU. The higher the value, the more filtering that is applied.
Different time constants can be specified for LOW airspeeds and HIGH airspeeds.
Selections: 0.050 to 1.500 in 0.001 increments
 GDU AIRSPEED TRANS TO: Specifies the airspeeds for applying the LOW and HIGH filtering
constants. The LOW filtering is applied until the airspeed transitions above the HIGH limit. When
the HIGH filtering is applied, it will be applied until the airspeed transitions below the LOW limit.
Selections: LOW: 0 to 25 kts/HIGH: 0 to 999 kts in 1 kt increments
 GDU VERTICAL SPEED: Specifies the filter time constant for the filtering that is applied to the
vertical speed display on the GDU. The higher the value, the more filtering that is applied.
Selections: 0.30 to 2.50 in 0.01 increments

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-67
5.5.3.2 ADC Configuration Page (GSU 75 or GDC 72)

NOTE
When initially turned to the ADC Configuration page, “updating” will temporarily
display to the right of ACTIVE. This indicates the configuration is being received from the
ADC.

NOTE
A predefined configuration may be loaded from the SOFTWARE UPLOAD page in the
SYS group.

NOTE
BINARY DATA MISMATCH will display if a CRC mismatch exists between the GDU and
the GSU, even in the non-displayed parameters.

NOTE
MISSING GDU STANDARD FIXED WING CONFIG DATA will display in the SET
column when the GDU uses Standard Configuration for fixed wing aircrafts and
configuration data is unavailable.

NOTE
MISSING GDU STANDARD ROTARY WING CONFIG DATA will display in the SET
column when the GDU uses Standard Configuration for rotary wing aircrafts and
configuration data is unavailable.

NOTE
MISSING GDU STANDARD RVSM CONFIG DATA will display in the SET column when
the GDU uses Standard Configuration for RVSM and configuration data is unavailable.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-68
 NOTE
Part number, version, and description shown will vary depending on whether the standard
or special config data is loaded.

G500/G500H/G600 (Page 1) G500H (Page 2)

Figure 5-26 ADC Configuration

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-69
The ADC Configuration page is displayed if the ADC is configured for GSU 75 or GDC 72.
The ADC Configuration page allows installers to do the following:
 Load configuration from the GDU to the GSU 75/GDC 72.
 Transfer the configuration from the GSU 75/GDC 72 to the GDU.
ADC Window:
 The SET column is the configuration stored in the GDU.
 The ACTIVE column is the configuration stored in the GSU 75/GDC 72.
There are two types of configurations that can be stored in the GDU. The GDU will use the standard
configuration, unless a special configuration has been loaded to it. If a special configuration has been
loaded, “Special Configuration” will be displayed at the bottom of the ADC window.
Standard Configuration
Generated from one of the following:
 An airframe specific Standard Configuration file for fixed and rotary wing aircraft, included with
GDU 620 software v7.10 or later.
 A Standard Configuration file for RVSM configurations, included with RVSM enablement card.
Special Configuration
Generated from:
 A predefined configuration loaded from the SOFTWARE UPLOAD page in SYS group.
 Pressing the ACTV>SET soft key, which writes the configuration settings that are stored in the
ADC to the GDU.
Part Number: Configuration part number
Version: Configuration version number
Description: Displays a description of the configuration

The SET>ACTV soft key writes the configuration settings that are stored in the GDU to the ADC. The
soft key will only be active when there is a configuration in the GDU to load into the ADC.The
ACTV>SET soft key writes the configuration settings that are stored in the ADC to the GDU.
The DWNLD CFG soft key downloads GDU configuration, ADC configuration, and calibration files to
the top SD card for troubleshooting.
The REVERT soft key defaults the GDU current configuration to the Standard Configuration.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-70
5.5.4 GDL Page Group (Available only when GDL 69 data link present)
5.5.4.1 GDL 69 Page

NOTE
Refer to GDL 69 Series TSO Installation Manual for antenna gains and calculation of
cable loss.

NOTE
The GDU 620 automatically calculates the total attenuation value that is required by the
GDL 69/69A. The GDU 620 prevents the installer from entering antenna gain and cable
loss values that result in a total attenuation that is outside the acceptable range of the
GDL 69/69A.

NOTE
GDL 69 software v3.40 is the minimum recommended for interfacing to the GDU 620.

The GDL 69 page allows installers to configure the GDL 69/69A.

Figure 5-27 GDL 69 Page

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-71
CONFIGURATION Window
 ANTENNA GAIN (LOWER dB): This is used to specify the antenna gain from 22.00 to
40.00 dB in 0.25 dB increments.
 CABLE LOSS (NOMINAL dB): This is used to specify the antenna cable loss from 3.00 to
11.00 dB in 0.1 dB increments.
 TOTAL ATTENUATION (dB): This field is automatically calculated based upon the antenna
gain and cable loss values.
 ETHERNET PORT 2/3/4: This is used to enable or disable Ethernet ports 2, 3, or 4 on the
GDL 69/69A. Units running software v7.20 or later the Ethernet ports are automatically enabled.
DATA Window
 ID: Displays the identification number for the data (GDL 69/69A) and audio (GDL 69A) radios.
 ACTIVE: Displays the active status for the data (GDL 69/69A) and audio (GDL 69A) radios.
 SIGNAL: Displays the signal strength for the data (GDL 69/69A) and audio (GDL 69A) radios.
 QUALITY OF SERVICE: Displays the quality of service for the data (GDL 69/69A) and audio
(GDL 69A) radios.
 TERRESTRIAL ERROR STATUS: Displays the terrestrial status for the data (GDL 69/69A)
and audio (GDL 69A) radios.
 SATELLITE 1 ERROR: Displays the error status for satellite 1.
 SATELLITE 2 ERROR: Displays the error status for satellite 2.
 TUNER STATUS: Displays the tuner status for the data (GDL 69/69A) and audio (GDL 69A)
radios.
The SET>ACTV soft key can be used to write the configuration settings that are stored in the GDU 620
configuration module to the GDL 69/69A. In general, this soft key would only be used when replacing a
GDL 69/69A.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-72
5.5.5 FCS Page Group (Flight Control System)
5.5.5.1 Autopilot Configuration Page
The autopilot configuration page allows the Installers to specify whether or not an autopilot is present in
the installation. This page allows the installer to configure the type of autopilot and adjust parameters for a
particular installation if necessary.

3rd Party Autopilot Configuration Page GFC 600 Configuration Page

Figure 5-28 Autopilot Configuration Page
SYSTEM Window
 AUTOPILOT: Specifies type of autopilot present.
Selections: Manual Entry; Bendix IN-831; Bendix M-4C/M-4D; Century 1C388/M;
Century 1C388C/MC; Century 1C388-2; Century 1C388-3; Century 2000; Century 21/31/41;
Century II or III; Century IV; Century NSD 360 AC; Century NSD 360 DC; Cessna 400B AC;
Cessna 400B DC; Collins APS-65; Collins PN 101; King KFC 250; King KFC 325; King KI 525;
King KFC 325/275; King KFC 225; Sperry SPZ-500; STEC 1500/2100 AC; STEC 1500/2100 DC;
GFC 600, GFC 500
 +MODE ANNUNCIATIONS: Specifies whether or not the GDU will provide the altitude
preselect function to a compatible autopilot. It is only displayed for autopilot types that provide
suitable mode annunciation data.
Displays: ARINC 429 or ARINC 429 Crossfill
 ALTITUDE PRESELECT: Specifies whether or not the GDU will provide the altitude preselect
function to a compatible autopilot. It is only displayed if the Altitude Preselect feature is enabled
(refer to section 5.5.1.6). For GAD 43e and GAD 43e crossfill options, enable the GAD 43
Adapter feature (refer to section 5.5.1.6). Set the Adapter to GAD 43e (refer to section 5.5.1.1).
Selections: S-TEC 55X, Discrete Out, GAD 43e (GDU 1 only), GAD 43e Crossfill (GDU 2 and
3 only)

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-73
CONFIGURATION Window

NOTE
NON-DEFAULT is displayed in yellow when one or more of the settings is changed from
its default value.

 Airspeed Limits Source (GFC 600 Only): Specifies which LRU controls the autopilot’s airspeed
limits. When GDU is not in control, PFD may reduce the displayed Vne to match the received
airspeed limit (if lower than the GDU’s own computed Vne).
 Vne (Pwr Off) Offset (GFC 600 Only): Specifies the difference between the Vne limit and Vne
(Pwr Off).
 Vne (Pwr Off) Minimum (GFC 600 Only): Specifies the lowest possible value that Vne (Pwr
Off) can be set.
 AC/DC: Type of error signal.
Selections: AC or DC
 HDG +: Positive sense of the heading error signal.
Selections: Left or Right
 CRS +: Positive sense of the course error signal.
Selections: Left or Right
 HDG V/DEG: Scaling of the heading error signal.
Selections: 0.000 to 1.000
 CRS V/DEG: Scaling of the course error signal.
Selections: 0.000 to 1.000
 V Min: Minimum voltage output for error signals.
Selections:+18.000 to -18.000
 V Max: Maximum voltage output for error signals.
Selections: +18.000 to -18.000
 V Ref: Voltage output for 0° heading/course error signal.
Selections: +18.000 to -18.000
Once the Autopilot type has been selected, the default values will be populated and displayed. If any
changes are made to the default values, the message “MODIFIED NONDFLT” will be displayed on the
screen.
ANALOG ROLL STEERING SCALING Window
 GPSS to HDG Datum Gain: Adjusts the scaling that is used to convert the ARINC 429 roll
steering command (bank angle) to a heading error.
Selections: 0.5 to 3.0 in 0.1 increments
For example: For a setting of 1.5, 1.0° of commanded bank angle is converted to 1.5° of heading
error.
 GPSS/HDG Control: Is used to specify what controls the GPSS mode.
Selections: None, Discrete In, HDG Key

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-74
ALTITUDE CAPTURE Window
The Altitude Capture settings are only available when the Altitude Preselect option is enabled on the
Feature Configuration page (section 5.5.1.6) and the Altitude Preselect is Present and set to DISCRETE
OUT.
The ALTITUDE CAPTURE* discrete output (section 4.2.8.7) is for use with autopilots that use a discrete
to engage the Altitude Hold mode. The ALTITUDE CAPTURE* discrete will output one momentary
active pulse for 500 ms when either (i) the aircraft has reached the preselected altitude
+/- the configured Altitude Threshold, or (ii) the aircraft is climbing/descending at a rate such that it will
reach the preselected altitude by the configured Time Threshold.
 ALTITUDE THRESHOLD: Difference from selected altitude that is used to determine when to
trigger the ALTITUDE CAPTURE* discrete output. When set to OFF, the altitude threshold value
is not used in determining when to trigger the ALTITUDE CAPTURE* discrete output. When set
to ON, the threshold value can be set from 0 to 500 ft in 10 ft increments.
Selections: OFF or ON
 TIME THRESHOLD: Based on current climb/descent rate, time to selected altitude that is used
to determine when to trigger the ALTITUDE CAPTURE* discrete output. When set to OFF, the
time threshold value is not used in determining when to trigger the ALTITUDE CAPTURE*
discrete output. When set to ON, the threshold value can be set from 0 to 30 sec in 1 sec
increments.
Selections: OFF or ON
 RE-ARM THRESHOLD: Is the difference from the selected altitude that is used to determine
when to trigger the ALTITUDE CAPTURE* discrete output again. When set to ON, the
ALTITUDE CAPTURE* discrete output may activate if the aircraft transitions outside the re-arm
threshold and either the altitude or time threshold values are satisfied. The threshold value can be
set from 0 to 500 ft in 1 ft increments. When set to OFF, the ALTITUDE CAPTURE* discrete
output is activated by crossing the selected altitude and/or the altitude or time thresholds as
previously described.
Selections: Off or On
GFC 500 Configuration
The GPSS/HDG Control setting must be set to either NONE or DISCRETE IN. To configure the
GPSS/HDG Control setting:
1. Press the inner MFD knob to activate the cursor.
2. Rotate the outer MFD knob until the autopilot type field is highlighted.
3. Rotate the inner MFD knob to select an autopilot system. Select any autopilot system other than
GFC 500/600.
4. Press the ENT key.
5. Rotate the outer MFD knob until the GPSS/HDG Control field is highlighted.
6. Rotate the inner MFD knob to select either NONE or DISCRETE IN.
7. Press the ENT key.
8. Rotate the outer MFD knob until the autopilot type field is highlighted.
9. Rotate the inner MFD knob to select the GFC 500.
10. Press the ENT key.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-75
5.5.5.2 Flight Director Page

NOTE
The Flight Director page and Flight Director Cal page are combined into a single Flight
Director page for GDU 620 software prior to v4.00.

The Flight Director page allows the installers to configure the flight director.

Figure 5-29 Flight Director Page

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-76
SYSTEM Window
FLIGHT DIRECTOR: Specifies type of flight director present.
Selections: Manual Entry, Cessna 400B/800B, Cessna 1000 IFCS, Collins AP-106/107, Collins APS-65,
King KCI 310, King KFC 225, King KI 256, Sperry SPZ-200/500, S-TEC 55X, S-TEC ST-670,
S-TEC 1500/2100, ARINC 429 (GDU 1 only), ARINC 429 Crossfill (GDU 2 and 3 only), GFC 600

NOTE
NON-DEFAULT is displayed in yellow when one or more of the settings is changed from
its default value.

CONFIGURATION Window
Depending upon the type of flight director that is configured, not all settings may be displayed.
 DISCRETE ENABLE: Enables or disables use of the FD Enable In discrete input
(section 4.2.7.5) when displaying the FD bars.
Selections: Enable, Disable
 PITCH THRESHOLD: If the DISCRETE ENABLE field is set to DISABLE, the GDU 620 will
use the pitch command (section 4.2.6) to determine whether or not to display the FD bars. When
the absolute value of the pitch command is less than the Pitch Threshold, the Flight Director is
considered valid and the FD bars will be displayed. Otherwise, the Flight Director is considered
invalid and the FD bars are removed.
Selections: 0 to 180 degrees, in 1 degree increments
 SVT FD DISPLAY (Synthetic Vision enabled): Enables or disables the flight director display
when SVT is selected for display on the PFD.
Selections: Enable, Disable
 SVT FD PITCH SCALING (Synthetic Vision enabled): Specifies the scaling that is applied to
the flight director display when synthetic vision is selected on the PFD.
Selections: 0.00 to 1.00 in 0.01 increments

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-77
5.5.5.3 Flight Director Cal Page (software v4.00 or later)

NOTE
The Flight Director Test page is not available with all autopilots.

Figure 5-30 Flight Director Cal Page

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-78
CONFIGURATION Window
Depending upon the type of flight director that is configured, not all settings may be displayed.
 PITCH FILTER: Specifies the type of pitch command filtering algorithm to be used.
Selections: Absolute or Relative
 PITCH FILTER TIME: Time constant (sec) for filtering applied to pitch axis of FD. A higher
value corresponds to a slower response to the analog inputs.
Selections: 0.0 to 9.9
 PITCH +: Positive sense of flight director pitch input.
Selections: Up or Down
 PITCH V/DEG: Scaling of flight director pitch input.
Selections: 0.000 to 9.999
 PITCH ANGLE MAX: Maximum allowed pitch command.
Selections: 0 to 90 degrees
 PITCH ANGLE MIN: Minimum allowed pitch command.
Selections: -90 to 0 degrees
 PITCH V ref: Specifies voltage for 0° pitch command.
Selections: -15.000 to +15.000 volts
 ROLL FILTER: Specifies the type of roll command filtering algorithm to be used.
Selections: Absolute or Relative
 ROLL FILTER TIME: Time constant (sec) for filtering applied to roll axis of FD. A higher
value corresponds to a slower response to the analog inputs.
Selections: 0.0 to 9.9
 ROLL +: Positive sense of flight director roll input.
Selections: Left or Right
 ROLL V/DEG: Scaling of flight director roll input.
Selections: 0.000 to 9.999
 ROLL ANGLE MAX: Maximum allowed roll command.
Selections 0.0 to 99.9 degrees
 ROLL V ref: Specifies voltage for 0° pitch command.
Selections: -15.750 to +15.750 volts
MONITOR Window
This window is used to monitor the flight director inputs into the GDU 620. There are no selectable items
in this window. The parameters are defined below:
 VALID/INVALID: State of the FD command bars based upon the configuration settings set on
the FLIGHT DIRECTOR page.
 FD PITCH: Raw value of the flight director pitch input.
 FD ROLL: Raw value of the flight director roll input.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-79
5.5.5.4 Autopilot Test Page

NOTE
The Autopilot Test page is not available with all autopilots.

The autopilot test page allows the installers to test the autopilot.

Figure 5-31 Autopilot Test Page

HEADING/COURSE DATUM Window
 HDG/CRS Test: Specifies status of heading/course test. Selections: Inactive, Active
DEVIATIONS Window
This window allows the installer to drive the GDU 620 lateral and vertical analog deviations being sent to
the autopilot.
 DEVIATION: Specifies the analog deviation output (lateral/vertical) in percent of full scale
deflection (Left/Right/Up/Down), in 1% increments.
 FLAG: Specifies the status of the low-level flag output (lateral/vertical).
Selections: Invalid, Valid
 SUPERFLAG: Specifies the status of the superflag output (lateral/vertical).
Selections: Invalid, Valid

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-80
DISCRETES Window
This window allows the installer to drive the GDU 620 discrete outputs being sent to the autopilot.
GPS ANNUNCIATE: Specifies status of GPS Annunciate discrete output.
Selections: Inactive, Active
 GPS SELECT: Specifies status of GPS Select discrete output.
Selections: Inactive, Active
 ILS/GPS APRCH: Specifies status of ILS/GPS Approach discrete output.
Selections: Inactive, Active
 BACK COURSE: Specifies status of Back Course discrete output.
Selections: Inactive, Active
ARINC 429 ROLL STEERING (GPSS) Window
If installed, the ARINC 429 roll steering (GPSS) window allows testing of the ARINC 429 roll steering
interface to the autopilot by allowing specific roll steering commands to be set.
 GPS BANK ANGLE: Specifies the bank angle output in degrees (Left or Right) in ARINC 429
label 121.
Selections: 180°L to 179°R in 1° increments
 GROUND SPEED: Specifies the groundspeed output in knots in ARINC 429 label 312.
Selections: 0 to 1000 knots in five knot increments
 GPSS VALID: Specifies whether or not label 121 is valid.
Selections: Valid, Invalid

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-81
5.5.6 GAD Page Group (software v3.00 or later)
5.5.6.1 GAD 43 Page
The GAD 43 page allows the GAD 43 to be configured to provide data in formats suitable for interfacing
to various systems.

Figure 5-32 GAD 43 Page

CONFIGURATION Window
 GYRO EMULATION TYPE: Specifies the type of attitude gyro that the GAD 43 outputs will
emulate. Selections: Collins 332D-11T, Cessna/ARC G519, King KI 256, King KVG 350, Sperry
VG-14A, Century 52C77-4 (Triden), Century 52C77-4 (41,)Century 52D67/M, Century 52D77-3,
Century 52D77-4, Century 52D167/M, Century 52D188(, ) Century 52D266, Century 52D267/M
(Triden), Century 52D267/M (2000), Heading Only, None
 YAW RATE SCALE FACTOR: Specifies the scaling in mV/deg/sec used on the YAW RATE/
BARO CORRECTION output. Selections: None, 100, 200, 333, 666 (mV/deg/sec)
 ANTICIPATOR ALGORITHM: Adjusts the GAD 43/43e output timing to match the AHRS
output timing. Selections: ON, OFF

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-82
OUTPUT TEST Window

NOTE
The OUTPUT TEST Window values simulate the AHRS inputs to the GAD 43. Depending
on the autopilot mode the output of the autopilot varies. For example if a right YAW RATE
value is entered and the autopilot is in a wings level mode then the autopilot could be
outputting a left turn.

 PITCH ANGLE: Specifies the pitch angle on all of the analog pitch outputs from the GAD 43.
Selections: 89° U to 90° D in 1° increments
 ROLL ANGLE: Specifies the roll angle on all of the analog roll outputs from the GAD 43.
Selections: 179° R to 180° L in 1° increments
 RELAY POSITION: Specifies the position of the Attitude Valid and AP Interlock Relay
contacts. Selections: Attitude Invalid or Attitude Valid
 YAW RATE: Specifies the yaw rate on the Yaw Rate/Baro Correction output from the GAD 43.
Selections: 127°/sec R to 128°/sec L in 1°/sec increments
 HEADING OUTPUT: Specifies the heading angle on the synchro heading output from the GAD
43. Selections: 0° to 359° in 1° increments
 HEADING VALID OUTPUT: Specifies the state of the Heading Valid discrete output.
Selections: Invalid or Valid
 SPARE DISC OUT 2*: Specifies the state of the Spare Disc Out 2 discrete output. Selections:
Active or Inactive

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-83
5.5.6.2 GAD 43e Page (software v6.10 or later)
The GAD 43e page allows the GAD 43e to be configured to accept interfaces to various systems.

Figure 5-33 GAD 43e Page

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-84
Activate the cursor, select the function, and then press the ENT key. This will activate or deactivate the
highlighted function. For activated functions, use the inner knob to select the appropriate emulation from
the drop down TYPE menu, and then press enter to select the emulation.
A green light means that the function is configured as present. No light (black) means that the function is
configured as not present (the TYPE field will be blank in this case).
Depending upon the type of interfacing systems that are configured, not all windows or settings will be
displayed.
CONFIGURATION Window
 Altitude Preselect: Specifies the type of altitude preselector that the GAD 43e will emulate.
Selections: King KAS 297, King KAS 297A, King KAS 297B, King KAS 297C #1,
United Ins 5506L-S, AA-801, S-TEC ST-360, King KAS 297C #2, King KAS 297C #3, Sperry SPZ-
200/500, Century 1D960.
 Radar Altimeter: Specifies the scaling type of radar altimeter that is connected to the GAD 43e.
Selections: KRA 405 / ALT-55, ARINC 552A, KING KRA 10, Sperry AA-100A, Sperry AA-200,
Sperry AA-100
 DME: Specifies the scaling type of DME system that is connected to the GAD 43e. Selections:
DME-40/42, DME-442/4000, KN 62/64, KN 63.
Tuning Source #1, Tuning Source #2, specifies which tuning sources (usually VHF
navigation receivers) are available to tune the DME transceiver.
Selections: Present, Not Present
Tuning Format, specifies the format in which the tuning source provides tuning information.
Selections: CSDB, Parallel (for DME-40/42 only), Serial, 2x5, BCD, SLIP (for KN 63 only)
KAS 297B GAIN STRAPS Window
 #1, #2, #3, #4: Specifies whether or not this KAS 297B gain strap is connected to the KAS 297B
being replaced. Selections: Present, Not Present

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-85
5.5.6.3 GAD43e Calibration Page (software v6.10 or later)

NOTE
NAV1 or NAV2 must be set to GAD 43e for GAD 43e Calibration page to appear.

Figure 5-34 GAD 43e Calibration Page

NAV 1 COMPOSITE and NAV 2 COMPOSITE Windows
1. Localizer, the READY light turns green when a valid localizer composite signal is being received
by the GAD 43e.
 The CALIBRATE soft key is enabled whenever the READY light is green. The
CALIBRATE soft key can be selected any time that there is a valid localizer being received.
It is recommended that a localizer with a full-scale deflection (approximately 0.155 DDM) is
simulated when the CALIBRATE soft key is selected.
 DDM displays the DDM currently being decoded by the GAD 43e. This value cannot be
edited.
 GAIN displays the localizer gain value being used by the GAD 43e. This value can be selected
and edited if required. If it is edited, it should be set to the value that results in the DDM
reading that most closely matches the localizer signal being simulated. Selections: 1 to 31, in
increments of 1.
2. VOR, the READY light turns green when a valid localizer composite signal is being received by
the GAD 43e.
 The CALIBRATE soft key is enabled whenever the READY light is green. The CALIBRATE
soft key should only be selected when a 0° FROM VOR signal is being simulated. This will
cause the GAD 43e to apply an offset to the VOR signals it decodes, so that the RAD field
displays 0°.
 RAD displays the VOR radial currently being decoded by the GAD 43e. This value cannot be
edited.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-86
5.5.7 WXR Group (software v3.00 or later)
The configuration page displayed in the WXR page group is dependent upon the configured type of radar.
Weather radar must be enabled to view this page.
5.5.7.1 ARINC 708 Weather Radar

NOTE
A708 must be selected for weather radar to view this page.

The ARINC 708 weather radar page allows the ARINC 708 weather radar to be configured.

Figure 5-35 A708 Weather Radar Page

STATUS Window (View Only)
This window shows the internal status being reported by the A708 weather radar.
 A green light indicates that the item is functioning correctly.
 A red light indicates that the weather radar is indicating a failure of that item.
 No light (black) indicates that no data is being received from the weather radar.
CONFIGURATION Window
 DISPLAY HEAD: Specifies whether the GDU 620 is radar display #1 or #2.
Selections: 1, 2
 RADAR MODE: Used to command the ARINC 708 weather radar into standby, test, or on mode.
Selections: Standby, Test, and WXR On
 CALIBRATION: Used to command the ARINC 708 into calibration mode.
Selections: Off, On

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-87
CALIBRATION Window

NOTE
Note: the settings in Calibration window can only be adjusted if CALIBRATION mode is
ON.

ROLL TRIM: Used to set the roll trim for a particular installation.
Selections: -4.000° to +3.875°, in 0.125° increments
 GAIN: Used to set the gain of the radar.
Selections: -31.5° to 0.0°, in 0.5° increments
 TILT SETTINGS: Used to set the tilt of the radar.
Selections: 15.00°U to 15.00°D, in 0.25° increments
 AZIMUTH: Displays the antenna azimuth angle reported by the radar.
Selections: None
 STABILIZATION: Displays whether radar stabilization is on or off, as reported by the radar.
Selections: None
 PITCH ANGLE: Displays the attitude stabilization source pitch angle, as reported by the radar.
Selections: None
 ROLL ANGLE: Displays the attitude stabilization source pitch angle, as reported by the radar.
Selections: None
 400 Hz REF: Displays the attitude stabilization source reference voltage, as reported by the radar.
Selections: None
 RANGE: Displays the range reported by the radar.
Selections: None
ANTENNA ELEVATION Window
 L: Displays the antenna tilt angle reported by the radar with the antenna at the far left of its sweep.
Selections: None
 C: Displays the antenna tilt angle reported by the radar with the antenna at the center of its sweep.
Selections: None
 R: Displays the antenna tilt angle reported by the radar with the antenna at the far right of its
sweep. Selections: None

NOTE
To display GAD 43 Output window, a A708 radar must be online and in calibration mode
with a GAD 43 present.

GAD 43 OUTPUT Window

 Pitch: Specifies the pitch angle on all of the analog pitch outputs from the GAD 43.
Selections: 89° U to 90° D in 1° increments
 Roll: Specifies the roll angle on all of the analog roll outputs from the GAD 43.
Selections: 179° R to 180° L in 1° increments

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-88
5.5.7.2 GWX Weather Radar

NOTE
The installer must push the SET>ACTV soft key after making a change in the SET column
or it will be lost when the page changes.

The GWX weather radar page allows the GWX 68/70/75 Weather Radar to be configured.
The ACTIVE column shows the GWX unit’s current settings. The SET column allows the installer to
change the settings. The changes are not automatically sent to the GWX.
Pressing the SET>ACTV soft key writes the configuration settings that are stored in the GDU to the
GWX. A progress box is displayed while the settings are transmitted to the GWX.
Pressing the ACTV>SET soft key writes the configuration settings that are stored in the GWX to the
GDU.
5.5.7.2.1 GWX 68 Weather Radar Page

Figure 5-36 GWX Weather Radar Page (GWX 68)

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-89
ATTITUDE DATA Window (View Only)
 SOURCE: Displays the source of attitude data that is currently being used by the GWX 68
weather radar.
Possible values: None, HSDB, A429 or Gyro
 RADAR PITCH: Displays the current pitch value being received by the GWX weather radar
from the stabilization source identified above.
 RADAR ROLL: Displays the current roll value being received by the GWX weather radar from
the stabilization source identified above.
STATUS Window (View Only)
This window shows the internal status being reported by the GWX weather radar.
 A green light indicates that the item is functioning correctly.
 A red light indicates that the GWX is indicating a failure of that item.
 No light (black) indicates that no data is being received from the GWX.
CONFIGURATION Window
 PITCH TRIM: Specifies the offset angle being used by the GWX for the pitch axis.
Selections: -4.00° to +4.00° in 0.05° increments
 ROLL TRIM: Specifies the offset angle being used by the GWX for the roll axis.
Selections: -4.00° to +4.00° in 0.05° increments
 RETURN BINS: Displays the number of range bins used to encode the data for one radar spoke.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-90
5.5.7.2.2 GWX 70 Weather Radar Page

NOTE
Attitude information is provided to the GWX 70 over the HSDB interface in GWX 70
software v2.20 or later. Earlier GWX 70 software versions require stabilization data to be
provided to the GWX 70 over a separate analog or ARINC 429 interface.

NOTE
Ground Clutter Suppression and Turbulence Detection on the GWX 70 with a 10"
antenna requires GDU software v7.35 or later.

Figure 5-37 GWX Weather Radar Page (GWX 70)

ATTITUDE DATA Window (View Only)
 SOURCE: Displays the source of attitude data that is currently being used by the GWX 70
weather radar.
Possible values: None, HSDB, A429 or Gyro
 RADAR PITCH: Displays the current pitch value being received by the GWX weather radar
from the stabilization source identified above.
 RADAR ROLL: Displays the current roll value being received by the GWX weather radar from
the stabilization source identified above.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-91
STATUS Window (View Only)
This window shows the internal status being reported by the GWX weather radar.
 A green light indicates that the item is functioning correctly.
 A red light indicates that the GWX is indicating a failure of that item.
 No light (black) indicates that no data is being received from the GWX.
CONFIGURATION Window
 PITCH TRIM: Specifies the offset angle being used by the GWX for the pitch axis.
 ROLL TRIM: Specifies the offset angle being used by the GWX for the roll axis.
 RETURN BINS: Displays the number of range bins used to encode the data for one radar spoke.
 GAIN OFFSET: Displays the value of the gain offset used to compensate for radome
performance.
 SCAN CONFIG: Displays the scan limits configuration set based on display support.
 LIMIT OFFSET L: Displays the left offsets used to reduce min/max azimuth angles.
 LIMIT OFFSET R: Displays the right offsets used to reduce min/max azimuth angles.
 AVG CRUISE SPEED: Displays the average aircraft cruise speed reported when GPS ground
speed information is not available.
 WING LOAD CLASS: Displays the wing loading class as reported by the GWX. This value is
predetermined and cannot be changed.
 ANTENNA SIZE: Displays the antenna size as reported by the GWX. This value is
predetermined and cannot be changed.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-92
5.5.7.2.3 GWX 75 Weather Radar Page (software v7.40 or later)

NOTE
Attitude information is provided to the GWX 75 over the HSDB interface.

Figure 5-38 GWX Weather Radar Page (GWX 75)

ATTITUDE DATA Window (View Only)
 SOURCE: Displays the source of attitude data that is currently being used by the GWX 75
weather radar.
Possible values: None, HSDB, A429 or Gyro
 RADAR PITCH: Displays the current pitch value being received by the GWX weather radar
from the stabilization source identified above.
 RADAR ROLL: Displays the current roll value being received by the GWX weather radar from
the stabilization source identified above.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-93
STATUS Window (View Only)
This window shows the internal status being reported by the GWX weather radar.
 A green light indicates that the item is functioning correctly.
 A red light indicates that the GWX is indicating a failure of that item.
 No light (black) indicates that no data is being received from the GWX.
CONFIGURATION Window
 PITCH TRIM: Specifies the offset angle being used by the GWX for the pitch axis.
 ROLL TRIM: Specifies the offset angle being used by the GWX for the roll axis.
 RETURN BINS: Displays the number of range bins used to encode the data for one radar spoke.
 GAIN OFFSET: Displays the value of the gain offset used to compensate for radome
performance.
 SCAN CONFIG: Displays the scan limits configuration set based on display support.
 LIMIT OFFSET L: Displays the left offsets used to reduce min/max azimuth angles.
 LIMIT OFFSET R: Displays the right offsets used to reduce min/max azimuth angles.
 AVG CRUISE SPEED: Displays the average aircraft cruise speed reported when GPS ground
speed information is not available.
 WING LOAD CLASS: Displays the wing loading class as reported by the GWX. This value is
predetermined and cannot be changed.
 ANTENNA SIZE: Displays the antenna size as reported by the GWX. This value is
predetermined and cannot be changed.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-94
5.5.8 LTNG Group
5.5.8.1 Stormscope Page

Figure 5-39 Stormscope Configuration Page

GDU Configuration Window
 Control From this GDU: Specifies whether the GDU 620 is in control of the Stormscope.
Selections: Yes, No (selecting no still allows Stormscope data to be displayed)

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-95
Stormscope Configuration Window (View Only)
The Stormscope configuration window displays Stormscope configuration data. Verify the status field
displays “Ok,” and the other displayed parameters are correct. Refer to the WX-500 Installation Manual to
determine the correct configuration.

NOTE
If the heading format is set to stepper, the heading will not agree with the HSI and may be
offset from the aircraft heading.

Data Window
The data window displays information from the WX-500 Stormscope depending on installer selection.
Selections: SW vrsn, Config, Environment, Fault Log
 SW vrsn displays the system model, main software version, main boot software version, and DSP
software version of the WX-500 Stormscope.
 Config displays configuration inputs and heading information. Refer to the WX-500 Installation
Manual for additional information.
 Environment displays environmental data such as the avionics bus voltage, internal voltage values,
and processor temperature.
 The Fault Log displays the 20 most recent errors detected by the system self test. For each error,
the corresponding error code and time of occurrence are saved. Refer to the WX-500 Install
Manual for a detailed description of faults. If the Fault Log is empty, “NO FAULTS DETECTED”
will be displayed. If a failure of non-volatile memory occurs and the Fault Log cannot be
displayed, then “DATA NOT AVAILABLE” will be displayed.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-96
5.5.8.2 Stormscope Data

Figure 5-40 Stormscope Data Configuration Page

Data Window
Displays heading, strike count, trigger count, and the mode selected.
Selections: Demo, Noise Monitor, Self Test, Strike Test, Weather
 Demo displays a simulation of lightning strikes.
 Noise monitor displays electrical noise as well as lightning/atmospheric electrical discharge
occurring within 400 nautical miles. The Noise monitor mode is used to identify sources of aircraft
based electrical noise that could interfere with lightning detection. Refer to the WX-500
Installation Manual for additional information.
 Self test initiates a diagnostic check of the WX-500 system.
 Strike test displays a fixed lightning strike target blinking on for one second then off for one
second at 18 nautical miles and 45 degrees. The Strike test mode is used to identify sources of
aircraft based electrical noise that could interfere with lightning detection. Refer to the WX-500
Installation Manual for additional information.
 Weather sets the WX-500 to normal operating mode.
Selection of the Strike key or the Cell key determines how the GDU 620 displays live lightning data from
the WX-500. Cell mode allows the grouping of strikes to depict weather cells. Strike mode displays strikes
as they are detected and does not group strikes into weather cells. The Clear key resets the strike and
trigger counts to zero.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-97
5.5.9 Traffic Page Group (software v4.00 or later)

CAUTION
The GDL 88 is not authorized for rotorcraft installations with GDU 620 software v7.00.
Future GDU 620 software versions will support GDL 88 rotorcraft installations.

NOTE
The Traffic Page group will be available if GTS 800, GTS 820, GTS 850, GDL 88, or GTS
ADS-B is selected as the traffic source on the system configuration page. Refer to
section 5.5.1.1.

These configuration pages allow the installer to configure a GTS 8XX traffic system over HSDB rather
than using the USB tool. Refer to GTS 8XX/GPA 65 Installation Manual for details about each of the
settings. The displayed configuration settings are retrieved from the GTS 8XX; if the GDU 620 is not
communicating with the GTS 8XX these fields will be blank.
5.5.9.1 GTS Status and Configuration Page

Figure 5-41 GTS Status and Configuration Page

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-98
FAULTS Window
The Faults window displays the status of various items internal to the GTS 8XX traffic computer.
 Green Light: The GTS 8XX is communicating with the GDU 620 and the indicated GTS 8XX
item is functioning correctly.
 Red Light: The GTS 8XX is communicating with the GDU 620 and the GTS 8XX has detected a
problem with that item.
 No Light (Black): The GTS 8XX is communicating with the GDU 620. (All items in the Faults
window will be black.)
STATUS Window
The Status window displays the status of various external inputs to the GTS 8XX traffic computer.
 Green Light: The device is configured as Present and valid data is being received as expected from
the device.
 Red Light: The device is configured as Present and invalid or no data is being received from the
device.
 No Light (Black): The device is configured as Not Present.
The LOAD soft key will cause the GDU 620 to re-request the current configuration data from the
GTS 8XX. Any changes that were made to the GTS 8XX configuration, and not saved, will be
discarded when the LOAD soft key is pressed.
The SAVE soft key saves any configuration changes that were made to the GTS 8XX.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-99
CONFIGURATION Window
The Configuration window displays the status of various external inputs to the GTS 8XX traffic computer.
 TOP ANTENNA: Specifies the type antenna used on top.
Selections: Garmin GA58, Sensor Systems
 TOP ANT CBL LOSS: Specifies the top antenna cable loss.
Selections: 0.1 dB to 4.0 dB in 0.1 dB increments
 BOTTOM ANTENNA: Specifies the type antenna used on the bottom.
Selections: None, Monopole, Garmin GA58, Sensor Systems
 BOT ANT CBL LOSS: Specifies the bottom antenna cable loss.
Selections: 0.1 dB to 4.0 dB in 0.1 dB increment
 MODE S ADDRESS: Specifies the Mode S address of the aircraft.
Selections: 000001 (hex) to FFFFFE (hex)
 ADS-B TX: Specifies whether or not the aircraft is equipped with an ADS-B transmitter.
Selections: Installed, Not Installed
 SQUAT SWITCH ON GND: Specifies the signal level corresponding to an on ground input for
the GTS 8XX AIR/GROUND* discrete input.
Selections: Ground, Open
 LDG GR TYPE: Specifies the type of landing gear on the aircraft.
Selections: Fixed, Retractable
 LDG GR DOWN: Specifies the signal level corresponding to a gear down input for the GTS 8XX
GEAR DOWN AND LOCKED* discrete input.
Selections: Ground, Open
 VOLUME: Selects the volume level of the GTS 8XX audio output.
Selections: 0.0 dB to -63.0 dB in 0.5 dB increments
 VOICE: Specifies the voice used for alerting.
Selections: Male, Female

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-100
 Figure 5-42 GTS Port Configuration Page
The LOAD soft key will cause the GDU 620 to re-request the current configuration data from the
GTS 8XX. Any changes that were made to the GTS 8XX configuration and not saved will be
discarded when the LOAD soft key is pressed.
The SAVE soft key saves any configuration changes that were made to the GTS 8XX.
BARO ALTITUDE SOURCE Window
 A429 Primary: Specifies the GTS 8XX ARINC 429 input that is used for the primary air data
input.
Selections: Chnl: Disabled, 429 IN 1 through 429 IN 6. Speed: Low, High
 A429 Secondary: Specifies the GTS 8XX ARINC 429 input that is used for the secondary air data
input.
Selections: Chnl: Disabled, 429 IN 1 through 429 IN 6. Speed: Low, High
 COM Port: Specifies the GTS 8XX RS-232 input that is used for air data input.
Selections: Disabled, RS-232 1 through S-232 5
RADIO ALTITUDE Window
 ARINC 429: Specifies the GTS 8XX ARINC 429 input that is used for the radio altitude input.
Selections: Chnl: Disabled, 429 IN 1 through 429 IN 6. Speed: Low, High
 Analog: Specifies the GTS 8XX RS-232 input that is used for air data input.
Selections: Disabled, ARINC 552, ARINC 552A, Bonzer MK10X, Collins ALT50, Collins ALT55,
King KRA10, King KRA405, Sperry AA100, Terra TRA3000/3500

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-101
GPS PVT SOURCE Window
 A429 Primary: Specifies the GTS 8XX ARINC 429 input that is used for the primary GPS data
input.
Selections: Chnl: Disabled, 429 IN 1 through 429 IN 6; Speed: Low, High
 A429 Secondary: Specifies the GTS 8XX ARINC 429 input that is used for the secondary GPS
data input.
Selections: Chnl: Disabled, 429 IN 1 through 429 IN 6; Speed: Low, High
MAG HEADING SOURCE Window
 A429 Primary: Specifies the GTS 8XX ARINC 429 input that is used for the primary magnetic
heading input.
Selections: Chnl: Disabled, 429 IN 1 through 429 IN 6; Speed: Low, High
 A429 Secondary: Specifies the GTS 8XX ARINC 429 input that is used for the secondary
magnetic heading input.
Selections: Chnl: Disabled, 429 IN 1 through 429 IN 6; Speed: Low, High
TRAFFIC OUTPUT Window
 ARINC 429: Specifies the GTS 8XX ARINC 429 output that is used to transmit traffic data.
Selections: Chnl: Disabled, 429 OUT 1 through 429 OUT 6; Speed: Low, High
 COM Port: Specifies the GTS 8XX RS-232 output that is used transmit traffic data.
Selections: Disabled, RS-232 1 through S-232 5

NOTE
The XPDR 1 COMMUNICATION and XPDR 2 COMMUNICATION windows will be only
be available if GTS 820, or GTS 850 is selected as the traffic source on the system
configuration page. Refer to section 5.5.1.1.

XPDR 1 COMMUNICATION Window

 A429 Receive: Specifies the GTS 8XX ARINC 429 input that is used to receive data from the
transponder.
Selections: Chnl: Disabled, 429 IN 1 through 429 IN 6; Speed: Low, High
 A429 Transmit: Specifies the GTS 8XX ARINC 429 output that is used to transmit data to the
transponder.
Selections: Chnl: Disabled, 429 OUT 1 through 429 OUT 6; Speed: Low, High
XPDR 2 COMMUNICATION Window
 A429 Receive: Specifies the GTS 8XX ARINC 429 input that is used to receive data from a
second transponder.
Selections: Chnl: Disabled, 429 IN 1 through 429 IN 6; Speed: Low, High
 A429 Transmit: Specifies the GTS 8XX ARINC 429 output that is used to transmit data to a
second transponder.
Selections: Chnl: Disabled, 429 OUT 1 through 429 OUT 6; Speed: Low, High

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-102
5.5.10 GSR Group

NOTE
This group is only available when the Iridium is configured as present. In software v4.00
this page is in the SYS page group.

5.5.10.1 Iridium Configuration Page

Figure 5-43 Iridium Configuration Page

FEATURES Window
 PHONE: Enables/disables the phone feature by selecting the feature and pressing the ENT key.
 POSITION REPORTING: Enables/disables the position reporting feature by selecting the
feature and pressing the ENT key.
 GFDS WEATHER: Enables/disables the receipt of GFDS weather data by selecting the feature
and pressing the ENT key.
SETTINGS Window
 RUDICS NUMBER: Is a number field that may be configured to the RUDICS number
appropriate for obtaining GFDS weather data.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-103
5.5.10.2 Position Reporting Page (software v5.00 or later)
In software v4.00 this page was in the SYS page group.

Figure 5-44 Position Reporting Page

STATUS Window
This window provides information regarding the status of the GSR 56.
 TIME UNTIL TRANSMIT: Displays the time in mm:ss until the next position report
transmission.
 REPORTING STATUS: Displays the status of the GSR 56. The following status information can
be displayed: Unavailable, Initializing, Idle–on–Ground, Transferring.
 REPORTS IN QUEUE: Displays how many reports are in line to be transmitted at the next
scheduled transmission.
SETTINGS Window
 REPORT TYPE: Specifies the type of position report that is transmitted over the Iridium
network.
Selections: Standard, AFF
 PERIOD: Specifies how often position reports are transmitted over the Iridium network. For the
Automatic selection, in one minute increments, the period of automatic position reports can be
specified from 2 to 60 minutes.
Selections: Off, Automatic

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-104
5.5.11 Engine Instrument System (EIS) Page Group
5.5.11.1 EIS Configuration

Figure 5-45 EIS Configuration Page

GENERAL Window
The GENERAL window provides configuration information for the EIS.
 EIS Mode: Displays the mode of the engine instrument system. Selections: Primary, Composite
 NO FUNCTION MSG: Displays “No function” when a soft key is pressed and there is no action
assigned to it.
Selections: Show, Hide
UNITS Window
This window provides configuration information as displayed on the gauge configuration page.
 TEMPERATURE: Displays temperature on gauge configuration page in selected temperature
units.
Selections: FAHRENHEIT(°F), CELSIUS(°C)
 PRESSURE: Displays pressure on gauge configuration page in selected pressure units.
Selections: POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH(PSI), BARS(BAR)
 DC LOAD: Displays voltage on gauge configuration page in selected units.
Selections: AMPERES(A), PERCENT(%)

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-105
5.5.11.2 Configuration Upload Page

NOTE
The Configuration Upload page will vary depending on the configurations loaded on the
data card and the particular aircraft. Any changes made to any page in the EIS Group can
be saved and/or uploaded here.

Figure 5-46 Configuration Upload Page

AIRFRAME Window
 Displays the airframe that is on the data card.
FILE Window
 Displays the file name(s) on the data card.
PRODUCT Window
 Displays what products are on the data card.
SUMMARY Window
 Displays the status of uploaded files.
 The CHK ALL soft key selects all the files.
 The LOAD soft key loads the selected files.
 The CLR CFG soft key clears the currently loaded configuration.
 The EXPORT soft key saves the current configuration to the data card.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-106
5.5.11.3 Gauge Configuration Page

NOTE
Depending on the installation, the gauge labels may be different.

NOTE
MAX for Color Band 1 will become the MIN for Color Band 2. Not all color band will be
available for all gauge types.
The gauge configuration page displays the configuration layout of the gauges and allows the installer to
select different color bands, annunciations, minimum, and maximum settings depending on the
installation.

Figure 5-47 Gauge Configuration Page

GENERAL Window
 Layout: Displays the currently selected layout.
Selections: Layout 1, Layout 2, Layout 3

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-107
GAUGES Window
Gauge Select: Used to select the gauge edit.
Selections: Oil Temp, Oil Press, XOIL Temp, XOIL Press, DC Volts, DC Load, Fuel Quantity, Fuel
Press, TRQ%, TOT, NG, NR, NP
Enabled: Used to enable or disable the display of the selected gauge.
Selections: On, Off
 Log Exceedances: Used to enable or disable the recording of any gauge that has entered into the
upper red range, if configured to do so.
Selections: On, Off
 Gauge Min: Minimum display range for the analog gauge.
 Gauge Max: Maximum display range for the analog gauge.
 Color Band 1: Used to select the color of Band 1.
Selections: Cyan, Green, Green+Tri, Red, Red+Circle, Red+Diamond, Red Flash, Red Flash 5S,
Red+Tri, White, Yellow, Yellow Alt, White to Red, Red Tick
a. Min: Minimum display range for Color Band 1.
b. Max: Maximum range for Color Band 1.
3. Color Band 2: Used to select the color of Band 2.
Selections: Green, Green+Tri, Red, Red+Circle, Red+Diamond, Red Flash, Red Flash 5S,
Red+Tri, White, Yellow, Yellow Alt, White to Red, Red Tick
a. Min: Minimum display range for Color Band 2.
b. Max: Maximum display range for Color Band 2.
PREVIEW DATA Window
The PREVIEW soft key displays the selected layout as it will be shown on the EIS screen and allows the
installer to enter a value to see how it will be displayed.
The DFLT soft key resets all the gauges to the settings on the installation data card.
The REMOVE soft key removes the current color band.
The INSERT soft key inserts new color band.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-108
5.5.11.4 GEA Configuration Page
The GEA configuration page displays the data of the selected GEA.

Figure 5-48 GEA Configuration Page

GEA Window
 Select GEA Source: Displays the currently selected source.
Selections: GEA1, GEA2
 Select GEA Board: Displays the currently selected board.
Selections: GEA Main, GEA I/O A, GEA I/O B
 Select Channel: Displays the currently selected channel. These selections are dependent upon
which GEA board (main, GEA I/O A, GEA I/O B) is selected.
Selections: 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A, 5A, 6A, 7A, 8A, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
DATA Window
This window is for informational purposes only and has no user enabled options.
The TYPE soft key displays the ANLG/CUR, ANGL IN, DIGITAL, ENG TEMP, BKSHELL, and
CUR MON soft keys.
The SET/ACTV soft key displays the current settings on the GDU and what is active on the GEA.
The SET>ACTV soft key copies the settings of the GDU to the GEA.
The VERIFY soft key compares the GDU and GEA settings and verifies that the settings match.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-109
5.5.11.5 Exceedance Log
The exceedance log page displays information of any gauge that is entered into the upper red range and is
configured to log exceedances from the Gauge Configuration page.

Figure 5-49 Exceedance Log Page

PASSWORD Window
 Enter Password: used to enter password. Password is needed to clear the exceedance log or the
TOT lamp.
 Set Password: Use to change the current password. An installer unlock card is required.
TOT LAMP Window
Displays the status of the TOT lamp.
LOG Window
Filter: used to display which items are shown in exceedance log.
The CLR LOG soft key clears the exceedance log.
The CLR TOT soft key resets the TOT LAMP window to read, “TOT LAMP IS UNLIT.”
The SAVE LOG soft key writes the exceedance log to an data card.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-110
5.5.12 DIAG Page Group
5.5.12.1 Port Monitoring Page

NOTE
Ports are selected by activating the cursor and moving it to the desired port.

The port monitoring page displays the status of the serial input ports. Data being received on a particular
port can be viewed.

Figure 5-50 Port Monitoring Page

PORTS Window
 ARINC 429: Select a port and information received on that port will be displayed on the right.
 RS-232: Select a port and information received on that port will be displayed on the right.
 RS-485: Select a port and information received on that port will be displayed on the right.
 ARINC 708: Select a port and information received on that port will be displayed on the right.
The PAUSE soft key pauses the data information for viewing. Pressing the PAUSE soft key a second time
will resume data streaming.
The CLR LOG soft key clears the information from the log window.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-111
5.5.12.2 Input Monitoring Page
The input monitoring page displays the status of the time mark, discrete, and analog inputs. There are no
selectable items on this page. The parameters are as described below.

Figure 5-51 Input Monitoring Page

TIME MARK Window
GPS1/GPS2, shows the status of each GPS time mark input into the GDU 620, as follows:
 A green light indicates that the time mark is being correctly received.
 A red light indicates that the time mark is expected but not being received.
 No light (black) indicates that the GPS is configured as Not Present (GPS2 only).
DISCRETE INPUTS Window
This window shows the status of all of the discrete inputs. If the Function name has an asterisk (*)
following it, it is Active Low; otherwise, it is Active High.
 A green light indicates that the input is active.
 No light (black) indicates that the input is inactive (open).

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-112
ANALOG INPUTS Window
 FLT DIR PITCH: Shows the voltage being received on the flight director pitch input.
 FLT DIR ROLL: Shows the voltage being received on the flight director roll input.
 ADF BEARING: Shows the bearing being received on the ADF input.
 ADF DC REF: Shows the voltage being received on the ADF DC Reference input.
 A/P AC REF AMPLITUDE: Shows the RMS value of the voltage being received on the
autopilot AC reference. If no AC voltage is being received, this value is displayed as “---”.
 A/P AC REF FREQ: Shows the frequency in Hz of the voltage being received on the autopilot
AC reference. If no AC voltage is being received, this value is displayed as “---”.
 LIGHTING BUS: Shows the voltage being received on the lighting bus input. The actual value
displayed depends upon the type of input configured on the Display Input Source (e.g., 14V DC,
28V DC, 5V DC, or 5V AC). If both the Display and Key input sources are configured to use the
photocell, NOT CONFIGURED is displayed.
5.5.12.3 Outputs Page
The outputs page allows the installer to turn the discrete outputs on and off.

Figure 5-52 Outputs Page

DISCRETE OUTPUTS Window
This window allows the discrete outputs to be turned on or off. An asterisk (*) following an item
indicates that the signal is an Active-Low. Use the cursor to select a discrete, and then press the ENT
key to toggle the state of the output.
 A green box indicates that the output is active (low).
 A black box indicates that the output is inactive (open).

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-113
5.5.12.4 Engine Data Page
The engine data page displays a summary of EIS data for informational purposes only.

Figure 5-53 Engine Data Page

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-114
5.5.12.5 GEA Status Page
The GEA status page displays a summary of the GEA(s) status.

Figure 5-54 GEA Status Page

GEA Window
 Select GEA Unit, used to select which GEA’s information to view. Selections: GEA1, GEA2
The remaining windows are for informational purposes only.
 The MAIN soft key displays the status, main analog, and I/O A analog information of the selected
GEA unit.
 The DATA soft key displays additional data of the selected GEA.
 The ANLG/CUR soft key displays analog current data.
 The ANLG IN soft key displays the analog input data.
 The DIGITAL soft key displays the digital input data.
 The MORE soft key displays the page that contains additional soft keys.
 The ENG TEMP soft key displays the temperature of the engine.
 The BKSHELL soft key displays the temperature of the backshell.
 The CUR MON soft key displays the data of the current monitor.
 The BACK soft key returns you to the previous page.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-115
5.5.12.6 Error Log Page

NOTE
A backed up file can only be restored on a GDU with the same SYS ID that is displayed on
the SYSTEM STATUS page. The CLR CFG soft key will reset all configuration and pilot
settings on the GDU to factory default settings.

NOTE
Factory calibration data and power-on stats are backed up, but cannot be restored or
deleted.

Figure 5-55 Error Log Page

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-116
EXCEPTIONS Window
This window lets you view the most recent exceptions (up to 100). Using the cursor you can highlight the
exception and view additional information in the lower half of the window. This information is used for
diagnostics and troubleshooting.
POWER ON STATS Window
 POWER CYCLES, indicates the number of times power has been applied to this particular
GDU 620.
 POWER HOURS, indicates the amount of time in hours that power has been applied to this
particular GDU 620.
The BKUP DATA soft key saves the GDUs configuration and enabled features to the SD card in the top
slot. For GDU #1 the file name is UNIT_DATA_GDU_1 and GDU #2 the file name is
UNIT_DATA_GDU_2.
The CLR LOG soft key clears all of the exceptions stored in the GDU 620 error log.
The RECOVER soft key loads the configuration and enabled features for GDU #1 or GDU #2 from the
top SD card into the GDU. The configuration stored on the SD card can only be returned to a unit with the
same SYS ID. This soft key will only appear when there is a GDU backup file on the top SD card.
The CLR CFG soft key resets the configuration and pilot settings to the factory defaults and clears
features that have been enabled.
All of the soft keys on this page present a confirmation box. The RESTORE and CLR CFG soft keys
instruct the user to power-cycle the GDU. No other actions are possible. The circuit breaker must be reset.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 5-117
6 RESERVED

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 6-1
7 LIMITATIONS
7.1 Operation ..........................................................................................................................................7-1
7.2 Installation ........................................................................................................................................7-1
7.2.1 Equipment Interfaced to the GDU 620 ......................................................................................7-1
7.2.2 TAWS.........................................................................................................................................7-1
7.1 Operation
All functions of the G600 variant of the GDU 620 meet the appropriate design assurance for a primary
system for aircraft in Class I, Class II, and Class III in accordance with AC 23.1309-1C, Figure 2.
All functions of the G500 variant of the GDU 620 meet the appropriate design assurance for a primary
system for aircraft in Class I, and Class II in accordance with AC 23.1309-1C, Figure 2. All functions of
the GDU 620 meet the appropriate hardware and software design assurance levels in accordance with
AC 27-1B, Section 27.1309.
7.2 Installation
The conditions and tests required for TSO authorization of this article are minimum performance
standards. It is the responsibility of those installing this article either on or within a specific type or class of
aircraft to determine that the aircraft installation conditions are within the TSO standards. TSO articles
must have separate approval for installation in an aircraft. The article may be installed only if performed
under 14 CFR Part 43 or the applicable airworthiness requirements.
7.2.1 Equipment Interfaced to the GDU 620
7.2.1.1 Traffic Sensor
The GDU 620 supports multiple types of traffic systems (TAS, TCAS I, and TIS), but only one system
may be configured for use.
7.2.1.2 GNS 500W Series TAWS Annunciation
Only TAWS alerts from the No. 1 system (i.e., GPS or GPS1) are displayed on the PFD. If the aircraft’s
TAWS system is embedded in a GNS 500W Series system configured as system No. 2, the remote
annunciations will not display on the GDU 620 PFD.
7.2.1.3 GSR 56 Iridium® Transceiver (GDU 620 Software v6.21 or Earlier)
When interfaced with a GSR 56 Iridium transceiver, only one data card may be present in the GDU 620
and it must be in the lower slot.
7.2.1.4 Weather Radar
The GDU 620 supports multiple types of weather radar systems (GWX 68, GWX 70, GWX 75,
ARINC 453/708), but only one system may be configured for use.
7.2.1.5 GDL 88
Rotorcraft installations must use GDU 620 software v7.01 or later when interfacing with a GDL 88.
7.2.2 TAWS
Aircraft installations that have a TAWS which generates aural and visual annunciations are not
interoperable with the GDU 620 internal implementation of TAWS (G600 only) or SVT-Terrain. Only
one TAWS may be installed in the aircraft. If an external TAWS is installed along with SVT on the
GDU 620, the GDU 620 must be configured to disable SVT-Terrain aural and visual annunciations.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 7-1
8 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
8.1 Continued Airworthiness ..................................................................................................................8-1
8.1 Continued Airworthiness
Maintenance of the GDU 620 is “on condition” only. For further information, refer to the GDU 620
Maintenance Manual, P/N 190-00601-10. For regulatory periodic functional checks, refer to approved
aircraft maintenance manuals or manual supplements for actual aircraft maintenance requirements.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page 8-1
APPENDIX A ENVIRONMENTAL QUALIFICATION FORM
Go to the Garmin Dealer Resource Center for the latest Environmental Qualification Form,
P/N 005-00313-20.

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page A-1
APPENDIX B OUTLINE AND INSTALLATION DRAWINGS
Figure B-1 Connector Locations ........................................................................................................... B-2
Figure B-2 Maximum Viewing Angle .................................................................................................. B-3
Figure B-3 GDU 620 Dimensions and Center of Gravity..................................................................... B-4
Figure B-4 Trim Plate P/N 115-01009-( )............................................................................................. B-5
Figure B-5 Cutout Template P/N 115-01010-00 .................................................................................. B-6
Figure B-6 Instrument Panel Cutout ..................................................................................................... B-7
Figure B-7 Typical Installation – Thin Trim Plate................................................................................ B-8
Figure B-8 Typical Installation – Thick Trim Plate.............................................................................. B-9

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page B-1
 J6201

J6202

J6203

Figure B-1 Connector Locations

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page B-2
 HORIZONTAL LINE OF SIGHT

30° MAXIMUM
INSTRUMENT
PANEL
GDU 620

VIEW LOOKING OUTBOARD

INSTRUMENT
GDU 620 PANEL GDU 620

45° 45°
MAXIMUM MAXIMUM

FORWARD
LINE OF SIGHT

VIEW LOOKING DOWN

Figure B-2 Maximum Viewing Angle

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page B-3
 Figure B-3 GDU 620 Dimensions and Center of Gravity

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page B-4
 UP

RIGHT

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION THICKNESS (in)

115-01009-00 TRIM PLATE, THIN 0.032
115-01009-10 TRIM PLATE, THICK 0.063

NOTES:
1. TWO TRIM PLATES ARE AVAILABLE. BOTH ARE 2024-T3 ALUMINUM, WITH THICKNESSES OF 0.032" AND 0.063".
2. TRIM PLATE IS CHROMATED. IT MUST BE CUT TO THE CORRECT SIZE AND PAINTED TO MATCH EACH INSTALLATION.

Figure B-4 Trim Plate P/N 115-01009-( )

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page B-5
 UP

OUTER PERIMETER OF
TEMPLATE IS SAME SIZE
AS GDU 620 BEZEL
RIGHT
10.00
9.600

3.050

6.459 6.70

3.250

CUTOUT PERIMETER

9.459
CUTOUT REPRESENTS
PFD DISPLAY AREA

NOTES:
1. CUTOUT TEMPLATE IS MADE FROM STAINLESS STEEL AND CAN BE USED FOR MULTIPLE
INSTALLATIONS.
2. CUTOUT TEMPLATE SHOULD BE TEMPORARILY AFFIXED TO INSTRUMENT PANEL IN DESIRED
LOCATION PRIOR TO MARKING CUTOUT. THE OUTSIDE EDGES OF THE CUTOUT PATTERN SHOULD
BE USED WHEN MARKING THE CUTOUT ONTO THE INSTRUMENT PANEL.
3. INSTRUMENT PANEL HOLES FOR GDU MOUNTING NUTPLATES SHOULD BE DRILLED USING A #30
(0.1285") DRILL BIT PRIOR TO REMOVAL OF THE TEMPLATE FROM THE INSTRUMENT PANEL. THE
HOLES ARE RESIZED LATER TO THEIR FINAL DIAMETER.

Figure B-5 Cutout Template P/N 115-01010-00

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page B-6
 FRONT SIDE VIEW

Figure B-6 Instrument Panel Cutout

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page B-7
 11 5-010 09-00 TRIM PLATE
I NSTRUMENT PANEL .0 32" THICK ,
(THIN TRI M PL ATE)

TO PREVENT AI R GA PS, LAY OUT THE TRIM

PLATE SO PARTIAL I NSTRUMENT ED GE CUTOUTS
ON PANEL ARE HI DDEN BENEA TH THE PL ATE

INSTA LL A LL NUTPLA TES ON

THE INSTRUMENT PA NEL
(FA RSIDE)

EXI STING INSTRUMENT

PANEL CUTOUTS
FOR A THIN TRIM PLATE INSTALLATION:
-L OC ATE A ND I NSTALL ALL NUTPL ATES ON THE INSTR UMENT PANEL SO
1 ) RI VET HEA DS ARE F LUSH AND HI DDEN BY TRIM PL ATE
2 ) NUTPLA TE BODY DOES NOT I NTERFER E WITH AD JAC ENT I NSTRUMENT B OD IES
3 ) NUTPLA TE BODY DOES NOT L IE IN C UTOUT OPENING
4 ) AD EQUATE INSTRUMENT PANEL M ATER IAL EXISTS.
-APPLY A FI NISH COAT OF PA INT TO PLA TE PRIOR TO F INAL INSTA LL.
-TRIM PLA TE OUTSIDE EDGE AS REQUI RED TO CL EAR AD JAC ENT INSTRUMENTS OR SWITCHES.
-F INI SH CORNERS AT R .25 " TYP.

Figure B-7 Typical Installation – Thin Trim Plate

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page B-8
 Figure B-8 Typical Installation – Thick Trim Plate

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page B-9
APPENDIX C INTERCONNECT DRAWINGS
Figure C-1 Power, Configuration Module, and Lighting - Single GDU Interconnect ......................... C-2
Figure C-2 Power, Configuration Module, and Lighting - Dual GDU Interconnect ............................ C-3
Figure C-3 Attitude - GRS 79/GDC 72 Air Data - Single GDU Interconnect ..................................... C-6
Figure C-4 Attitude - GRS 79/GDC 72 Air Data - Dual GDU Interconnect ........................................ C-7
Figure C-5 Attitude - GRS 77/GDC 74 Air Data - Single GDU Interconnect ..................................... C-9
Figure C-6 Attitude - GRS 77/GDC 74 Air Data - Dual GDU Interconnect ...................................... C-10
Figure C-7 Attitude - GSU 75 Air Data - Single GDU Interconnect.................................................. C-11
Figure C-8 Attitude - GSU 75 Air Data - Dual GDU Interconnect .................................................... C-12
Figure C-9 GPS - Single GDU Interconnect....................................................................................... C-14
Figure C-10 GPS - Dual GDU Interconnect ......................................................................................... C-16
Figure C-11 NAV - Single GDU Interconnect ..................................................................................... C-18
Figure C-12 NAV - Dual GDU Interconnect ........................................................................................ C-19
Figure C-13 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect ............................................................................. C-21
Figure C-14 Audio Interconnect ........................................................................................................... C-24
Figure C-15 GDL 69/69A Interconnect ................................................................................................ C-25
Figure C-16 Stormscope Interconnect .................................................................................................. C-26
Figure C-17 WXR Interconnect ............................................................................................................ C-28
Figure C-18 Traffic Interconnect .......................................................................................................... C-30
Figure C-19 ADF Interconnect ............................................................................................................. C-33
Figure C-20 GAD 43/43e Interconnect................................................................................................. C-34
Figure C-21 Video Interconnect............................................................................................................ C-36
Figure C-22 GSR Interconnect.............................................................................................................. C-37
Figure C-23 Radar Altimeter Interconnect ........................................................................................... C-38
Figure C-24 GEA Interconnect ............................................................................................................. C-39
Figure C-25 ADS-B/FIS-B Interconnect .............................................................................................. C-41

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-1
 9
GDU 620 PFD/MFD PFD
P6202 8

AIRCRAFT POWER 1 20 AWG ESSENTIAL BUS

3 5A (28 VDC)
AIRCRAFT POWER 34 20 AWG
7.5A (14 VDC)
AIRCRAFT GND 2 20 AWG AIRCRAFT
3
AIRCRAFT GND 35 20 AWG GROUND

5
CONFIG MODULE PWR 49 RED 4
CONFIG MODULE GND 50 BLK 1 CONFIG
CONFIG MODULE DATA 32 YEL 3 MODULE
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK 33 WHT 2 4

LIGHTING BUS HI 15 TO AIRCRAFT

6 7
LIGHTING BUS LO 16 LIGHTING BUS

NOTES:

1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND

3 BOTH POWER LEADS AND BOTH GROUND LEADS ARE REQUIRED.

4 CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED IN THE BACKSHELL OF THE P6202 CONNECTOR.

CONFIGURATION MODULE HARNESS USES 28 AWG WIRES. CONTACTS SUPPLIED WITH

5 CONFIGURATION MODULE MUST BE USED FOR CONNECTING CONFIGURATION MODULE HARNESS
TO P6202.

THE GDU 620 MUST BE CONFIGURED FOR THE CORRECT LIGHTING BUS VOLTAGE (28 VDC, 14 VDC,
5 VDC OR 5 VAC). NO DAMAGE WILL OCCUR IF THE UNIT IS CONFIGURED INCORRECTLY. A MANUAL
6 LIGHTING CONTROL OPTION IS AVAILABLE. REFER TO SECTION 5 FOR THE POST-INSTALLATION
CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE.
OPTIONAL CONNECTION. IF NOT CONNECTED, THE GDU 620 LIGHTING MUST BE CONFIGURED TO
AUTOMATICALLY COMPENSATE FOR AMBIENT LIGHTING CONDITIONS USING ITS PHOTOCELL. A
7 MANUAL LIGHTING CONTROL OPTION IS AVAILABLE. REFER TO SECTION 5 FOR THE POST-
INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE.
THE GDU 620 MUST BE ON AN ESSENTIAL BUS OR A BUS THAT RECEIVES POWER AS SOON AS THE
BATTERY MASTER IS TURNED ON. THE GRS 77 AND GDC 74A MUST BE ON THE SAME POWER BUS
8 AS THE GDU 620. THE GDU 620 MUST NOT BE ON THE AVIONICS POWER BUS OR A BUS THAT
AUTOMATICALLY SHEDS WITH THE LOSS OF A GENERATOR/ALTERNATOR.

9 CIRCUIT BREAKER SHOULD BE LABELED AS SHOWN.

Figure C-1 Power, Configuration Module, and Lighting - Single GDU Interconnect

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-2
 10
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1
P6202 PFD 1 11

AIRCRAFT POWER 1 20 AWG ESSENTIAL BUS

3
AIRCRAFT POWER 34 20 AWG 5A (28 VDC)
7.5A (14 VDC)
AIRCRAFT GND 2 20 AWG AIRCRAFT
3
AIRCRAFT GND 35 20 AWG GROUND

5
CONFIG MODULE PWR 49 RED 4
CONFIG MODULE GND 50 BLK 1 CONFIG
CONFIG MODULE DATA 32 YEL 3 MODULE
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK 33 WHT 2 4

LIGHTING BUS HI 15 TO AIRCRAFT

6 7
LIGHTING BUS LO 16 LIGHTING BUS

P6201
ETHERNET IN 2A 30
ETHERNET IN 2B 31
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33
S

8 9
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2
P6201
ETHERNET IN 2B 31
ETHERNET IN 2A 30
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32
S
CDU SYSTEM ID PGM* 4
13
GROUND 22

P6202 PFD 2
AIRCRAFT POWER 1 20 AWG AVIONICS OR MAIN BUS
3
AIRCRAFT POWER 34 20 AWG 5A (28 VDC)
7.5A (14 VDC)
AIRCRAFT GND 2 20 AWG AIRCRAFT
3 GROUND
AIRCRAFT GND 35 20 AWG

5
CONFIG MODULE PWR 49 RED 4
CONFIG MODULE GND 50 BLK 1 CONFIG
CONFIG MODULE DATA 32 YEL 3 MODULE
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK 33 WHT 2 4

LIGHTING BUS HI 15 TO AIRCRAFT

6 7
LIGHTING BUS LO 16 LIGHTING BUS

Figure C-2 Power, Configuration Module, and Lighting - Dual GDU Interconnect
Sheet 1 of 3

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-3
NOTES:

1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND

3 ALL POWER AND GROUND LEADS MUST BE CONNECTED.

4 CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED IN THE BACKSHELL OF THE P6202 CONNECTOR.

CONTACTS SUPPLIED WITH CONFIGURATION MODULE MSUT BE USED FOR CONNECTING

5 CONFIGURATION MODULE HARNESS TO P6202.

THE GDU 620 MUST BE CONFIGURED FOR THE CORRECT LIGHTING BUS VOLTAGE (28 VDC, 14 VDC,
5 VDC, OR 5 VAC). NO DAMAGE WILL OCCUR IF THE UNIT IS CONFIGURED INCORRECTLY. A MANUAL
6 LIGHTING CONTROL OPTION IS AVAILABLE. REFER TO SECTION 5 FOR THE POST-INSTALLATION
CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE.
OPTIONAL CONNECTION. IF NOT CONNECTED, THE GDU 620 LIGHTING MUST BE CONFIGURED TO
AUTOMATICALLY COMPENSATE FOR AMBIENT LIGHTING CONDITIONS USING ITS PHOTOCELL. A
7 MANUAL LIGHTING CONTROL OPTION IS AVAILABLE. REFER TO SECTION 5 FOR THE POST-
INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE.

GDU #1 MUST BE CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO GDU #2. IT IS NOT PERMITTED TO CONNECT TO

8 ANOTHER DEVICE (E.G., GDL 69/69A) BETWEEN BOTH GDUS.

Figure C-2 Power, Configuration Module, and Lighting - Dual GDU Interconnect
Sheet 2 of 3

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-4
 9 USE AIRCRAFT GRADE CATEGORY 5 ETHERNET CABLE. THIS INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING:

MANUFACTURER P/N
CARLISLE INTERCONNECT TECHNOLOGIES 392404 (24 GAUGE)
D100-0824-100 (24 GAUGE)
EMTEQ
D10004-664 (24 GAUGE)
E10424 (24 GAUGE)
PIC WIRE AND CABLE E12424 (24 GAUGE)
E51424 (24 GAUGE)
TENSOLITE NF24Q100 (24 GAUGE)
THERMAX MX100Q-24 (24 GAUGE)

10 CIRCUIT BREAKER SHOULD BE LABELED AS SHOWN.

IF THE AIRCRAFT DOES NOT HAVE AN ESSENTIAL BUS, CONNECT TO A BUS THAT RECEIVES POWER
11 AS SOON AS THE BATTERY MASTER IS TURNED ON. THE BUS MUST NOT BE AUTOMATICALLY SHED
WITH THE LOSS OF A GENERATOR/ALTERNATOR.

AT THE GDU 620, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS
12
MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES.

CDU SYSTEM ID PGM* MAY BE CONNECTED TO SHIELD BLOCK, AND IS NOT REQUIRED IF THE GDU IS
13 CONFIGURED AS GDU #1, #2, OR #3. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.1 FOR DETAILS.

Figure C-2 Power, Configuration Module, and Lighting - Dual GDU Interconnect
Sheet 3 of 3

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-5
 GDU 620 PFD/MFD GRS 79 AHRS
P6202 P791
ARINC 429 IN 1A 4 27 ARINC 429 OUT AHRS 1A
ARINC 429 IN 1B 21 7 ARINC 429 OUT AHRS 1B
s s
RS-232 IN 1 10 51 RS-232 OUT AHRS 1
RS-232 OUT 1 27 52 RS-232 IN AHRS 1
RS-232 GND 1 44 32 RS-232 AHRS 1 GND
s s
RS-232 OUT 4 30 72 RS-232 IN AHRS 2
4 4
RS-232 GND 4 47 73 RS-232 AHRS 2 GND
s s
4
N/C 75 SYS ID* 1
N/C 57 SYS ID* 2
N/C 48 SIGNAL GROUND

GDC 72 ADC
P721

ARINC 429 IN 2A 5 1 ARINC 429 OUT ADC1A

ARINC 429 IN 2B 22 2 ARINC 429 OUT ADC 1B
s s
RS-232 IN 2 11 69 RS-232 OUT ADC 1
RS-232 OUT 2 28 70 RS-232 IN ADC 1
RS-232 GND 2 45 68 RS-232 ADC 1 GND
s s

N/C 75 SYS ID* 1

N/C 57 SYS ID* 2
N/C 48 SIGNAL GROUND

NOTES:

1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND

AT GDU 620, GRS 79, AND GDC 72, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL --
3 THE SHIELD LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0".

4 THIS CONNECTION IS ONLY REQUIRED IF GPS #2 IS CONNECTED TO THE GDU 620.

Figure C-3 Attitude - GRS 79/GDC 72 Air Data - Single GDU Interconnect

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-6
 GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1 GRS 79 AHRS
P6202 P791
ARINC 429 IN 1A 4 27 ARINC 429 OUT AHRS 1A
ARINC 429 IN 1B 21 7 ARINC 429 OUT AHRS 1B
s s
RS-232 IN 1 10 51 RS-232 OUT AHRS 1
RS-232 OUT 1 27 52 RS-232 IN AHRS 1
RS-232 GND 1 44 32 RS-232 AHRS 1 GND
s s
RS-232 OUT 4 30 72 RS-232 IN AHRS 2
4
RS-232 GND 4 47 73 RS-232 AHRS 2 GND
s s
75 SYS ID* 1
N/C 57 SYS ID* 2
48 SIGNAL GROUND

GDC 72 ADC
P721
ARINC 429 IN 2A 5 1 ARINC 429 OUT ADC1A
ARINC 429 IN 2B 22 2 ARINC 429 OUT ADC 1B
s s
RS-232 IN 2 11 69 RS-232 OUT ADC 1
RS-232 OUT 2 28 70 RS-232 IN ADC 1
RS-232 GND 2 45 68 RS-232 ADC 1 GND
s s
75 SYS ID* 1
N/C 57 SYS ID* 2
48 SIGNAL GROUND

GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2 GRS 79 AHRS

P6202 P791
ARINC 429 IN 1A 4 27 ARINC 429 OUT AHRS 1A
ARINC 429 IN 1B 21 7 ARINC 429 OUT AHRS 1B
s s
RS-232 IN 1 10 51 RS-232 OUT AHRS 1
RS-232 OUT 1 27 52 RS-232 IN AHRS 1
RS-232 GND 1 44 32 RS-232 AHRS 1 GND
s s
RS-232 OUT 4 30 72 RS-232 IN AHRS 2
4
RS-232 GND 4 47 73 RS-232 AHRS 2 GND
s s
N/C 75 SYS ID* 1
57 SYS ID* 2
48 SIGNAL GROUND

GDC 72 ADC
P721
ARINC 429 IN 2A 5 1 ARINC 429 OUT ADC1A
ARINC 429 IN 2B 22 2 ARINC 429 OUT ADC 1B
s s

RS-232 IN 2 11 69 RS-232 OUT ADC 1

RS-232 OUT 2 28 70 RS-232 IN ADC 1
RS-232 GND 2 45 68 RS-232 ADC 1 GND
s s
N/C 75 SYS ID* 1
57 SYS ID* 2
48 SIGNAL GROUND

Figure C-4 Attitude - GRS 79/GDC 72 Air Data - Dual GDU Interconnect
Sheet 1 of 2

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-7
NOTES:

1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND

AT GDU 620, GRS 79, AND GDC 72, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL --
3 THE SHIELD LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0".

4 THIS CONNECTION IS ONLY REQUIRED IF GPS #2 IS CONNECTED TO THE GDU 620.

Figure C-4 Attitude - GRS 79/GDC 72 Air Data - Dual GDU Interconnect
Sheet 2 of 2

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-8
 GDU 620 PFD/MFD GRS 77 AHRS
P6202 P771
ARINC 429 IN 1A 4 14 ARINC 429 OUT 1A
ARINC 429 IN 1B 21 29 ARINC 429 OUT 1B
s s
RS-232 IN 1 10 26 GPS1 RS-232 OUT
RS-232 OUT 1 27 11 GPS1 RS-232 IN
RS-232 GND 1 44 41 SIGNAL GND
s s
RS-232 OUT 4 30 6 GPS2 RS-232 IN
4 4
RS-232 GND 4 47 35 SIGNAL GND
s s
4
N/C 2 AHRS SYSTEM ID PGM* 1
N/C 3 AHRS SYSTEM ID PGM* 2
N/C 37 SIGNAL GROUND

GDC 74A ADC

P741

ARINC 429 IN 2A 5 26 ARINC 429 OUT 1A

ARINC 429 IN 2B 22 27 ARINC 429 OUT 1B
s s
RS-232 IN 2 11 11 RS-232 OUT 1
RS-232 OUT 2 28 10 RS-232 IN 1
RS-232 GND 2 45 12 RS-232 GND 1
s s

N/C 6 ADC SYSTEM ID PGM* 1

N/C 71 ADC SYSTEM ID PGM* 2
N/C 7 SIGNAL GROUND

NOTES:

1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND

AT GDU 620, GRS 77, AND GDC 74A, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL.
3
THE SHIELD LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES.

4 THIS CONNECTION IS ONLY REQUIRED IF GPS #2 IS CONNECTED TO THE GDU 620.

Figure C-5 Attitude - GRS 77/GDC 74 Air Data - Single GDU Interconnect

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-9
 GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1 GRS 77 AHRS #1
P6202 P771
ARINC 429 IN 1A 4 14 ARINC 429 OUT 1A
ARINC 429 IN 1B 21 29 ARINC 429 OUT 1B
s s
RS-232 IN 1 10 26 RS-232 OUT 1
RS-232 OUT 1 27 11 RS-232 IN 1
RS-232 GND 1 44 41 RS-232 GND 1
s s
RS-232 OUT 4 30 6 GPS2 RS-232 IN
RS-232 GND 4 47 35 SIGNAL GND
s s
2 AHRS SYSTEM ID PGM* 1
N/C 3 AHRS SYSTEM ID PGM* 2
37 SIGNAL GROUND

GDC 74A ADC #1

P741
ARINC 429 IN 2A 5 26 ARINC 429 OUT 1A
ARINC 429 IN 2B 22 27 ARINC 429 OUT 1B
s s
RS-232 IN 2 11 11 RS-232 OUT 1
RS-232 OUT 2 28 10 RS-232 IN 1
RS-232 GND 2 45 12 RS-232 GND 1
s s
6 ADC SYSTEM ID PGM* 1
N/C 71 ADC SYSTEM ID PGM* 2
7 SIGNAL GROUND

GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2 GRS 77 AHRS #2

P6202 P771
ARINC 429 IN 1A 4 14 ARINC 429 OUT 1A
ARINC 429 IN 1B 21 29 ARINC 429 OUT 1B
s s
RS-232 IN 1 10 26 RS-232 OUT 1
RS-232 OUT 1 27 11 RS-232 IN 1
RS-232 GND 1 44 41 RS-232 GND 1
s s
RS-232 OUT 4 30 6 GPS2 RS-232 IN
RS-232 GND 4 47 35 SIGNAL GND
s s
N/C 2 AHRS SYSTEM ID PGM* 1
3 AHRS SYSTEM ID PGM* 2
37 SIGNAL GROUND

GDC 74A ADC #2

P741
ARINC 429 IN 2A 5 26 ARINC 429 OUT 1A
ARINC 429 IN 2B 22 27 ARINC 429 OUT 1B
s s

RS-232 IN 2 11 11 RS-232 OUT 1

RS-232 OUT 2 28 10 RS-232 IN 1
RS-232 GND 2 45 12 RS-232 GND 1
s s
N/C 6 ADC SYSTEM ID PGM* 1
71 ADC SYSTEM ID PGM* 2
72 SIGNAL GROUND

NOTES:
1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND

AT GDU 620, GRS 77, AND GDC 74A, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL.
3
THE SHIELD LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES.

Figure C-6 Attitude - GRS 77/GDC 74 Air Data - Dual GDU Interconnect

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-10
 Attitude – Air Data Interconnect
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1 GSU 75 AHRS/ADC #1
P6202 P751
ARINC 429 IN 1A 4 27 ARINC 429 OUT ADAHRS 1A
ARINC 429 IN 1B 21 7 ARINC 429 OUT ADAHRS 1B
s s
RS-232 IN 1 10 51 RS-232 OUT AHRS 1
RS-232 OUT 1 27 52 RS-232 IN AHRS 1
RS-232 GND 1 44 32 RS-232 AHRS 1 GND
s s
RS-232 OUT 4 30 72 RS-232 IN AHRS 2
RS-232 GND 4 47 73 RS-232 AHRS 2 GND
s s
3

ARINC 429 IN 2A 5 1 ARINC 429 OUT ADC 1A

ARINC 429 IN 2B 22 2 ARINC 429 OUT ADC 1B
s s
RS-232 IN 2 11 69 RS-232 OUT ADC 1
RS-232 OUT 2 28 70 RS-232 IN ADC 1
RS-232 GND 2 45 68 RS-232 ADC 1 GND
s s

N/C 75 SYS ID 1
N/C 57 SYS ID 2
N/C 48 GND
4

NOTES:

1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND

3 THIS CONNECTION IS ONLY REQUIRED IF GPS #2 IS CONNECTED TO THE GDU 620.

4 ANY GROUND PIN ON THE GSU MAY BE USED.

AT GDU 620 AND GSU 75, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE
5
SHIELD LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES.

Figure C-7 Attitude - GSU 75 Air Data - Single GDU Interconnect

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-11
 Attitude – Air Data Interconnect
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1 GSU 75 AHRS/ADC #1
P6202 P751
ARINC 429 IN 1A 4 27 ARINC 429 OUT ADAHRS 1A
ARINC 429 IN 1B 21 7 ARINC 429 OUT ADAHRS 1B
s s
RS-232 IN 1 10 51 RS-232 OUT AHRS 1
RS-232 OUT 1 27 52 RS-232 IN AHRS 1
RS-232 GND 1 44 32 RS-232 AHRS 1 GND
s s
RS-232 OUT 4 30 72 RS-232 IN AHRS 2
RS-232 GND 4 47 73 RS-232 AHRS 2 GND
s s
3

ARINC 429 IN 2A 5 1 ARINC 429 OUT ADC 1A

ARINC 429 IN 2B 22 2 ARINC 429 OUT ADC 1B
s s
RS-232 IN 2 11 69 RS-232 OUT ADC 1
RS-232 OUT 2 28 70 RS-232 IN ADC 1
RS-232 GND 2 45 68 RS-232 ADC 1 GND
s s

75 SYS ID 1
N/C 57 SYS ID 2
48 GND
4

GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2 GSU 75 AHRS/ADC #2

P6202 P751
ARINC 429 IN 1A 4 27 ARINC 429 OUT ADAHRS 1A
ARINC 429 IN 1B 21 7 ARINC 429 OUT ADAHRS 1B
s s
RS-232 IN 1 10 51 RS-232 OUT AHRS 1
RS-232 OUT 1 27 52 RS-232 IN AHRS 1
RS-232 GND 1 44 32 RS-232 AHRS 1 GND
s s
RS-232 OUT 4 30 72 RS-232 IN AHRS 2
RS-232 GND 4 47 73 RS-232 AHRS 2 GND
s s
3

ARINC 429 IN 2A 5 1 ARINC 429 OUT ADC 1A

ARINC 429 IN 2B 22 2 ARINC 429 OUT ADC 1B
s s
RS-232 IN 2 11 69 RS-232 OUT ADC 1
RS-232 OUT 2 28 70 RS-232 IN ADC 1
RS-232 GND 2 45 68 RS-232 ADC 1 GND
s s

N/C 75 SYS ID 1
57 SYS ID 2
48 GND
4

Figure C-8 Attitude - GSU 75 Air Data - Dual GDU Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-12
NOTES:

1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND

3 THIS CONNECTION IS ONLY REQUIRED IF GPS #2 IS CONNECTED TO THE GDU 620.

4 ANY GROUND PIN ON THE GSU MAY BE USED.

AT GDU 620 AND GSU 75, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE
5
SHIELD LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES.

Figure C-8 Attitude - GSU 75 Air Data - Dual GDU Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-13
 GDU 620 PFD/MFD 5 P6202 GPS NO. 1 6
GARMIN NAVIGATOR

RS232 IN 3 12 RS232 OUT (MAPMX)

RS232 GND 3 46 GROUND
s
TIME MARK IN 1A 40 TIME MARK OUT +
GPS 1
TIME MARK IN 1B 41 TIME MARK OUT -
s
7
ARINC 429 IN 3A 6 GPS 429 OUT A
(GAMA 429)
ARINC 429 IN 3B 23 GPS 429 OUT B
s

ARINC 429 OUT 1A 3 GPS 429 IN A

(GARMIN GDU)
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 20 GPS 429 IN B
s

GPS NO. 2 6
GARMIN NAVIGATOR

GPS 429 IN A (GARMIN GDU)

GPS 429 IN B

RS232 IN 4 13 RS232 OUT (MAPMX)

s
TIME MARK IN 2A 42 TIME MARK OUT +
GPS 2 TIME MARK IN 2B 43 TIME MARK OUT -
s
7
ARINC 429 IN 5A 8 GPS 429 OUT A
9 (GAMA 429)
ARINC 429 IN 5B 25 GPS 429 OUT B
s

Figure C-9 GPS - Single GDU Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-14
NOTES:

1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND

AT THE GDU 620, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS
3 MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT CHASSIS WITH
AS SHORT A CONDUCTOR AS PRACTICAL.

4 IF ONLY ONE NAVIGATOR IS INSTALLED, WIRE AS SHOWN FOR GPS 1.

5 FOR GDU 620 SETUP ITEMS, REFER TO SECTION 5.5.

IF A TAWS-EQUIPPED 500W SERIES UNIT IS INSTALLED, IT MUST BE CONNECTED AS GPS 1. ONLY

TAWS ANNUNCIATIONS FROM GPS 1 ARE DISPLAYED ON THE PFD. IF TWO TAWS-EQUIPPED UNITS
6 ARE INSTALLED, THE TAWS-EQUIPPED UNIT THAT IS CONNECTED TO THE AUDIO PANEL MUST BE
CONNECTED AS GPS 1.

THE TIME MARK B/- CONNECTION IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THE 400W/500W SERIES UNITS AND
7 SHOULD BE LEFT UNCONNECTED IN THE INSTALLATION.

REFER TO MANUFACTURER’S DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE PIN-OUT AND INTERCONNECT

8
INFORMATION. PIN-OUTS OF OTHER UNITS ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.

DEFAULT ARINC 429 INPUT SHOWN. OTHER ARINC 429 INPUTS (INPUTS 4 THROUGH 8 ONLY) MAY BE
9 USED INSTEAD. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.8 FOR DETAILS ON HOW TO CONFIGURE THE ARINC 429
INPUTS.

Figure C-9 GPS - Single GDU Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-15
 GPS NO. 1 6
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1 5 GARMIN NAVIGATOR
P6202

Rev. AD
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 3 GPS 429 IN A
(GARMIN GDU)
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 20 GPS 429 IN B
s

190-00601-04
RS232 IN 3 12 RS232 OUT (MAPMX)
RS232 GND 3 46 GROUND
s
TIME MARK IN 1A 40 TIME MARK OUT +
GPS 1
TIME MARK IN 1B 41 TIME MARK OUT -
s

ARINC 429 IN 3A 6 GPS 429 OUT A

(GAMA 429)
ARINC 429 IN 3B 23 GPS 429 OUT B
s

RS232 IN 4 13
s

TIME MARK IN 2A 42
GPS 2 TIME MARK IN 2B 43
s

9 ARINC 429 IN 5A 8
ARINC 429 IN 5B 25
s

GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2 5

P6202

Sheet 1 of 2
RS232 IN 3 12
RS232 GND 3 46
s
TIME MARK IN 1A 40
GPS 1
TIME MARK IN 1B 41
s

ARINC 429 IN 3A 6 GPS NO. 2

6
ARINC 429 IN 3B 23 GARMIN NAVIGATOR

Figure C-10 GPS - Dual GDU Interconnect

s

RS232 IN 4 13 RS232 OUT (MAPMX)

s
TIME MARK IN 2A 42 TIME MARK OUT +
GPS 2 TIME MARK IN 2B 43 TIME MARK OUT -
s
7
ARINC 429 IN 5A 8 GPS 429 OUT A
9 (GAMA 429)
ARINC 429 IN 5B 25 GPS 429 OUT B
s

ARINC 429 OUT 1A 3 GPS 429 IN A (GARMIN GDU)

ARINC 429 OUT 1B 20 GPS 429 IN B
s

GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Page C-16
NOTES:

1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND

AT THE GDU 620, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS
3 MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT CHASSIS WITH
AS SHORT A CONDUCTOR AS PRACTICAL.

4 FOR INSTALLATIONS WITH DUAL GDUs, TWO SUITABLE GPS SENSORS ARE REQUIRED.

5 FOR GDU 620 SETUP ITEMS, REFER TO SECTION 5.5.

IF A TAWS-EQUIPPED 500W SERIES UNIT IS INSTALLED, IT MUST BE CONNECTED AS GPS 1. ONLY

TAWS ANNUNCIATIONS FROM GPS 1 ARE DISPLAYED ON THE PFD. IF TWO TAWS-EQUIPPED UNITS
6 ARE INSTALLED, THE TAWS-EQUIPPED UNIT THAT IS CONNECTED TO THE AUDIO PANEL MUST BE
CONNECTED AS GPS 1.

THE TIME MARK B/- CONNECTION IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THE 400W/500W SERIES UNITS AND
7 SHOULD BE LEFT UNCONNECTED IN THE INSTALLATION.

REFER TO MANUFACTURER’S DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE PIN-OUT AND INTERCONNECT

8
INFORMATION. PIN-OUTS OF OTHER UNITS ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.

DEFAULT ARINC 429 INPUT SHOWN. OTHER ARINC 429 INPUTS (INPUTS 4 THROUGH 8 ONLY) MAY BE
9 USED INSTEAD. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.8 FOR DETAILS ON HOW TO CONFIGURE THE ARINC 429
INPUTS.

Figure C-10 GPS - Dual GDU Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-17
 ARINC 429
GDU 620 6 NAV 1 (NAV 2)
P6202 4
7
ARINC 429 IN 4(6)A 7(9) VOR/ILS 429 OUT A
NAV 1(2)
ARINC 429 IN 4(6)B 24(26) VOR/ILS 429 OUT B
s

RS-232
NAV 1 OR NAV 2
GARMIN
4 5
SL30
GDU 620 6 37-Pin
P6202
NAV 1 RS-232 OUT 5 31 4 RXD1
OR RS-232 IN 5 14 5 TXD1
NAV 2 RS-232 GND 5 48 3 SERIAL GROUND
s

NOTES:

1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND

AT THE GDU 620, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS
MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT CHASSIS WITH
3
AS SHORT A CONDUCTOR AS PRACTICAL, IN ACCORDANCE WITH LRU INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS.

4 IF ONLY ONE NAV RECEIVER IS INSTALLED, WIRE AS SHOWN FOR NAV 1.

ONLY ONE SL30 MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE GDU 620. IT CAN BE CONFIGURED AS NAV 1 OR NAV 2
5 IF NAV 1 IS CONFIGURED FOR AN ARINC 429 NAV SOURCE.

6 FOR GDU 620 SETUP ITEMS, REFER TO SECTION 5.5.

DEFAULT ARINC 429 INPUT SHOWN. OTHER ARINC 429 INPUTS (INPUTS 4 THROUGH 8 ONLY) MAY BE
7 USED INSTEAD. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.8 FOR DETAILS ON HOW TO CONFIGURE THE ARINC 429
INPUTS.

Figure C-11 NAV - Single GDU Interconnect

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-18
 ARINC 429
PILOT’S GDU 620 6 NAV 1
P6202 4
9
ARINC 429 IN 4A 7 VOR/ILS 429 OUT A
8 NAV 1 VOR/ILS 429 OUT B
ARINC 429 IN 4B 24
s
9
ARINC 429 IN 6A 9
8 NAV 2
ARINC 429 IN 6B 26
s

COPILOT’S GDU 620 6

P6202
9
ARINC 429 IN 4A 7 NAV 2
8 NAV 1
ARINC 429 IN 4B 24
s
4
9
ARINC 429 IN 6A 9 VOR/ILS 429 OUT A
8 NAV 2 VOR/ILS 429 OUT B
ARINC 429 IN 6B 26
s

RS-232
PILOT’S GDU 620 6
P6202
9
NAV 1 RS-232 OUT 5 31
OR RS-232 IN 5 14
NAV 2 RS-232 GND 5 48 NAV 1 OR NAV 2
s
GARMIN
4 5 7
SL30
COPILOT’S GDU 620 6 37-Pin
P6202
NAV 1 RS-232 OUT 5 31 N/C 9 4 RXD1
OR RS-232 IN 5 14 5 TXD1
NAV 2 RS-232 GND 5 48 3 SERIAL GROUND
s

Figure C-12 NAV - Dual GDU Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-19
NOTES:

1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND

AT GDU 620, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS
MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT CHASSIS WITH
3
AS SHORT A CONDUCTOR AS PRACTICAL, IN ACCORDANCE WITH LRU INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS.

4 IF ONLY ONE NAV RECEIVER IS INSTALLED, WIRE AS SHOWN FOR NAV 1.

ONLY ONE SL30 MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE GDU 620. IT CAN BE CONFIGURED AS NAV 1, OR AS
5 NAV 2 IF NAV 1 IS CONFIGURED FOR AN ARINC 429 NAV SOURCE.

6 FOR GDU 620 SETUP ITEMS, REFER TO SECTION 5.5.

THE SL30 MUST BE CONNECTED AS THE SAME NAVIGATION SOURCE TO BOTH GDUs
7 (I.E., AS NAV 1 ON BOTH GDUs OR AS NAV 2 ON BOTH GDUs).

DEFAULT ARINC 429 INPUT SHOWN. OTHER ARINC 429 INPUTS (INPUTS 4 THROUGH 8 ONLY) MAY BE
8 USED INSTEAD. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.8 FOR DETAILS ON HOW TO CONFIGURE THE ARINC 429
INPUTS.

CONNECTION FROM NAV RADIO CAN BE MADE TO BOTH GDUs AS SHOWN, OR ONLY CONNECTED TO
ONE GDU (EITHER PILOT’S OR COPILOT’S) AND NAVIGATION INFORMATION CROSS-FILLED TO THE
9 OTHER GDU. DIRECT CONNECTION TO EACH GDU IS PREFERRED. CROSS-FILL OPTION SHOULD
ONLY BE USED IF THERE ARE AN INSUFFICIENT NUMBER OF GDU ARINC 429 INPUTS TO SUPPORT
ALL ARINC 429 INTERFACES IN A PARTICULAR INSTALLATION.

Figure C-12 NAV - Dual GDU Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-20
 6

GDU 620 PFD/MFD AUTOPILOT COMPUTER

P6201
FD ENABLE IN 9 FD ENABLE OUT
s
FD ROLL LEFT 34 FD ROLL LEFT
FD ROLL RIGHT 35 FD ROLL RIGHT
s
s
FD PITCH DOWN 16 FD PITCH DOWN
FD PITCH UP 15 FD PITCH UP
s

P6203
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 18 HEADING ERROR HI (H)
A/P HEADING ERROR LO 40 HEADING ERROR LO (C)
s
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 19 A/P COURSE ERROR HI (H)
A/P COURSE ERROR LO 41 A/P COURSE ERROR LO (C)
s
7 GPS ANNUNCIATE* 44 GPSS STEERING ENABLE

ARINC 429 OUT 2A 1 ARINC 429 IN A

ARINC 429 OUT 2B 23 ARINC 429 IN B
s

7 GPS SELECT* 45 GPS SELECT

7 ILS/GPS APPROACH* 46 ILS ENERGIZE

LATERAL +FLAG OUT 54 LAT DEV FLAG +

LATERAL -FLAG OUT 55 LAT DEV FLAG -
s
LATERAL +LEFT OUT 52 LAT DEV + LEFT
LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 53 LAT DEV + RIGHT
s
VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 58 GS DEV FLAG +
VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 59 GS DEV FLAG -
s
VERTICAL +UP OUT 56 GS DEV + UP
VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 57 GS DEV + DOWN
s
ARINC 429 IN 8A 5 ARINC 429 OUT A
8 9 ARINC 429 IN 8B 27 ARINC 429 OUT B
s
A/P AC REF HI 20 FROM A/P COMPUTER OR AIRCRAFT
A/P AC REF LO 42 AC REFERENCE VOLTAGE 4
5

Figure C-13 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 3

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-21
 GFC 600

GDU 620 PFD/MFD or GMC 605

GDU 620 #1 PFD/MFD P6201 P6051 (MODE CONTROLLER)
11
ETHERNET IN 1A 11 46 ETHERNET OUT 2A
10 ETHERNET IN 1B 12 47 ETHERNET OUT 2B
ETHERNET OUT 1A 13 44 ETHERNET IN 2A
ETHERNET OUT 1B 14 45 ETHERNET IN 2B
S S

GDU 620 #2 PFD/MFD

P6201 P6052
11
ETHERNET IN 1A 11 20 ETHERNET OUT 3A
ETHERNET IN 1B 12 30 ETHERNET OUT 3B
10
ETHERNET OUT 1A 13 19 ETHERNET IN 3A
ETHERNET OUT 1B 14 18 ETHERNET IN 3B
S S

GFC 500

GDU 620 PFD/MFD P6203 P292 GAD 29 (B)

ARINC 429 OUT 2A 1 23 ARINC 429 RX 1A

12 ARINC 429 OUT 2B 23 11 ARINC 429 RX 1B
s s

12 ARINC 429 OUT 3A 2 22 ARINC 429 RX 2A

ARINC 429 OUT 3B 24 10 ARINC 429 RX 2B
s s

8 ARINC 429 IN 7A 4 24 ARINC 429 TX 1A

ARINC 429 IN 7B 26 12 ARINC 429 TX 1B
s s

Figure C-13 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 3

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-22
NOTES:
1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND

AT THE GDU 620, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS
3 MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT CHASSIS WITH
AS SHORT A CONDUCTOR AS PRACTICAL.

THE A/P AC REF INPUT IS ONLY REQUIRED FOR AUTOPILOTS THAT USE AN AC HEADING AND
4 COURSE ERROR INPUT.

CONNECTIONS ARE ONLY REQUIRED FOR THOSE INPUTS THAT THE AUTOPILOT COMPUTER
5 SUPPORTS.

FOR DUAL-GDU 620 SYSTEMS, CONNECT THE FD SIGNALS TO THE SAME PINS ON GDU #2 AS WELL.
6 ALL OTHER AUTOPILOT SIGNALS SHOULD BE CONNECTED ONLY TO GDU #1.

DEFAULT DISCRETE OUT FUNCTION FOR THIS PIN IS SHOWN. THIS PIN FUNCTION IS CONFIGURABLE
7 AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 5.5.

THERE IS NO DEFAULT CONFIGURATION FOR THIS ARINC 429 INPUT. AN UNUSED ARINC 429 INPUT
8 (INPUTS 4 THROUGH 8 ONLY) MUST BE ASSIGNED TO THIS FUNCTION. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.8
FOR DETAILS ON HOW TO CONFIGURE THE ARINC 429 INPUTS.

ARINC 429 AUTOPILOT MODE ANNUNCIATIONS ARE ONLY PROVIDED TO GDU #1. AUTOPILOT MODE
9 ANNUNCIATIONS ARE CROSS-FILLED TO OTHER GDUs.

10 ANY AVAILABLE ETHERNET PORT MAY BE USED.

USE AIRCRAFT GRADE CATEGORY 5 ETHERNET CABLE. THIS INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING:
11
MANUFACTURER P/N

CARLISLE INTERCONNECT
392404 (24 GAUGE)
TECHNOLOGIES
D100-0824-100 (24 GAUGE)
EMTEQ
D10004-664 (24 GAUGE)
E10424 (24 GAUGE)
PIC WIRE AND CABLE E12424 (24 GAUGE)
E51424 (24 GAUGE)
TENSOLITE NF24Q100 (24 GAUGE)
THERMAX MX100Q-24 (24 GAUGE)

THERE IS NO DEFAULT CONFIGURATION FOR THIS ARINC 429 OUT. AN UNUSED ARINC 429 OUTPUT
12 (OUTPUTS 3 OR 4 ONLY) MUST BE ASSIGNED TO THIS FUNCTION. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.8 FOR
DETAILS ON HOW TO CONFIGURE THE ARINC 429 OUTPUTS.

Figure C-13 Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect

Sheet 3 of 3

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-23
 GDU 620 PFD/MFD
AUDIO PANEL
P6201
HI 28 HI UNSWITCHED
AUDIO OUT AUDIO IN
LO 29 LO
s
AUDIO INHIBIT IN* 3 6 7

AUDIO ACTIVE OUT* 23 4 5

NOTES:

1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND

AT THE GDU 620, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS
3
MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES.

USE THE AUDIO ACTIVE OUT* DISCRETE OUTPUT TO INHIBIT AURAL ALERTS FROM LOWER PRIORITY
4 SYSTEMS WHENEVER THE GDU 620 IS PLAYING AUDIO MESSAGES.

DEFAULT DISCRETE OUT FUNCTION FOR THIS PIN IS SHOWN. THIS PIN FUNCTION IS CONFIGURABLE
5 AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 5.5.

6 FUNCTION NOT CURRENTLY IMPLEMENTED FOR FIXED-WING G500/G600.

USE THE AUDIO INHIBIT IN* DISCRETE INPUT TO SUPPRESS FLTA CAUTION AURAL ALERTS
7 (G500H ONLY).

Figure C-14 Audio Interconnect

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-24
 GDU 620 PFD/MFD or
GDU 620 #1 PFD/MFD GDL 69/69A
P6201 P691
5
ETHERNET IN 1A 11 25 ETHERNET OUT 1A
4 ETHERNET IN 1B 12 24 ETHERNET OUT 1B
ETHERNET OUT 1A 13 23 ETHERNET IN 1A
ETHERNET OUT 1B 14 22 ETHERNET IN 1B
S S

GDU 620 #2 PFD/MFD

P6201
5
ETHERNET IN 1A 11 29 ETHERNET OUT 2A
4 ETHERNET IN 1B 12 28 ETHERNET OUT 2B
6
ETHERNET OUT 1A 13 27 ETHERNET IN 2A
ETHERNET OUT 1B 14 26 ETHERNET IN 2B
S S

NOTES:

1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND

AT THE GDU 620, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS
3 MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT THE SHIELD GROUNDS AT THE GDL 69/69A TO ITS
CONNECTOR BACKSHELL IN ACCORDANCE WITH GDL 69/69A INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.
ANY AVAILABLE ETHERNET PORT MAY BE USED. IF THERE ARE NO FREE PORTS ON THE GDU 620,
THE OTHER LRU MUST BE DISCONNECTED AND THE GDL 69/69A MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE GDU
4 620 IN ITS PLACE. THE DISCONNECTED LRU MUST BE CONNECTED TO ETHERNET PORT 2, 3, OR 4 ON
THE GDL 69/69A.

5 USE AIRCRAFT GRADE CATEGORY 5 ETHERNET CABLE. THIS INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING:

MANUFACTURER P/N
CARLISLE INTERCONNECT TECHNOLOGIES 392404 (24 GAUGE)
D100-0824-100 (24 GAUGE)
EMTEQ
D10004-664 (24 GAUGE)
E10424 (24 GAUGE)
PIC WIRE AND CABLE E12424 (24 GAUGE)
E51424 (24 GAUGE)
TENSOLITE NF24Q100 (24 GAUGE)
THERMAX MX100Q-24 (24 GAUGE)

ETHERNET PORT 3 OR 4 MAY BE USED INSTEAD. THE PORT THAT IS USED MUST BE ENABLED IN
6 CONFIGURATION MODE. REFER TO THE GDL 69/69A INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL
DETAILS.

Figure C-15 GDL 69/69A Interconnect

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-25
 SINGLE GDU INSTALLATION
GDU DISPLAYS AND CONTROLS STORMSCOPE
WX-500
STORMSCOPE
P2
GDU 620 PFD/MFD
5 RS-232_GND
P6203
P3
RS232 GND 6 49
RS232 IN 6 6 20 RS232 TX
RS232 OUT 6 28 8 RS232 RX
s
5

GDU DISPLAYS STORMSCOPE DATA ONLY

GDU 620 PFD/MFD WX-500

STORMSCOPE
P6203 P2
RS232 GND 6 49 5 RS-232_GND
RS232 IN 6 6
RS232 OUT 6 28 N/C s
P3
5 20 RS232 TX
8 RS232 RX

TO STORMSCOPE
CONTROL AND DISPLAY

DUAL GDU INSTALLATION 4

GDU 620 PFD/MFD WX-500

(SECONDARY) STORMSCOPE
P6203 P2
RS232 GND 6 49 5 RS-232_GND
RS232 IN 6 6
RS232 OUT 6 28 N/C s
P3
20 RS232 TX
5 8 RS232 RX
GDU 620 PFD/MFD
(PRIMARY)
P6203
RS232 GND 6 49
RS232 IN 6 6
RS232 OUT 6 28
s

Figure C-16 Stormscope Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-26
NOTES:
1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
AT GDU 620, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS
3 MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT CHASSIS WITH
AS SHORT A CONDUCTOR AS PRACTICAL.

IF DUAL GDUs ARE INSTALLED, ONLY ONE GDU (THE PRIMARY) CAN CONTROL THE STORMSCOPE.
4 BOTH GDUs CAN BE USED TO DISPLAY STORMSCOPE DATA. EITHER GDU #1 OR GDU #2 MAY BE
CONNECTED AS THE PRIMARY STORMSCOPE DISPLAY.

DEFAULT INTERCONNECTS ARE SHOWN. THE STORMSCOPE MAY BE CONNECTED TO ANY

5 AVAILABLE RS-232 PORT.

Figure C-16 Stormscope Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-27
 HSDB WEATHER RADAR
10
GWX
GWX 68 GWX 70 GWX 75 WEATHER RADAR R/T
GDU 620 PFD/MFD
P6201 P400 P751 P27000
5
A 32 34 4 4 A
ETHERNET OUT 2 ETHERNET IN
B 33 35 3 3 B
4 A 30 36 23 23 A
ETHERNET IN 2 ETHERNET OUT
B 31 37 22 22 B
s s
44 56 56 RT ON/OFF
15 8 8 SIGNAL GROUND

ARINC 708 WEATHER RADAR

GDU 620 PFD/MFD 8 7 WEATHER RADAR R/T

P6203
A 16 A ARINC 453 OUT
6 ARINC 453/708 IN 2
B 38 B (WEATHER)
s
A 3 A ARINC 429 IN
ARINC 429 OUT 4 B (CONTROL)
B 25
s
9 WX RADAR ON* XX RT ON/OFF

A 17
ARINC 453/708 IN 2 TERM 7
B 39

Figure C-17 WXR Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-28
NOTES:
1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
AT THE GDU 620, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS
3 MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT CHASSIS WITH
AS SHORT A CONDUCTOR AS PRACTICAL.

ANY AVAILABLE ETHERNET PORT MAY BE USED. IF THERE ARE NO FREE ETHERNET PORTS ON THE
4 GDU, THE GWX MAY BE CONNECTED TO ANY ETHERNET PORT ON THE GDL 69.

5 USE AIRCRAFT GRADE CATEGORY 5 ETHERNET CABLE. THIS INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING:

MANUFACTURER P/N
CARLISLE INTERCONNECT TECHNOLOGIES 392404 (24 GAUGE)
D100-0824-100 (24 GAUGE)
EMTEQ
D10004-664 (24 GAUGE)
E10424 (24 GAUGE)
PIC WIRE AND CABLE E12424 (24 GAUGE)
E51424 (24 GAUGE)
TENSOLITE NF24Q100 (24 GAUGE)
THERMAX MX100Q-24 (24 GAUGE)

6 THE WXR ARINC 453/708 INPUT IS UNTERMINATED.

IF THE GDU 620 IS THE ONLY EQUIPMENT ON THE ARINC 453/708 OUTPUT BUS FROM THE WEATHER
RADAR, OR IF IT IS DESIRED TO UTILIZE THE GDU 620 INTERNAL TERMINATION RESISTOR, INSTALL
7 THE TERMINATION JUMPER AS SHOWN. THE LENGTH OF THIS JUMPER SHOULD NOT EXCEED 3.0". IF
MULTIPLE PIECES OF EQUIPMENT ARE ON THE ARINC 453/708 BUS, ONLY ONE TERMINATION
RESISTOR SHOULD BE UTILIZED.

THE GDU 620 MAY BE CONNECTED AS INDICATOR #1 OR INDICATOR #2. DO NOT CONNECT THE GDU
8 620 AS INDICATOR #3.

THIS PIN FUNCTION IS CONFIGURABLE AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 5.5. CONFIGURE THE

9 CONNECTED DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR WEATHER RADAR ON*.

FOR SOFTWARE V7.00 AND LATER, ATTITUDE INFORMATION IS PROVIDED TO THE GWX 70 OVER
10 HSDB INTERFACE. FOR EARLIER SOFTWARE VERSIONS, STABILIZATION DATA MUST BE PROVIDED
TO THE GWX 70 OVER A SEPARATE ANALOG OR ARINC 429 INTERFACE.

Figure C-17 WXR Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-29
 TAS SOURCE
TRAFFIC ADVISORY
GDU 620 PFD/MFD SYSTEM
P6203
6 13
A 4 A TRAFFIC OUT
12 ARINC 429 IN 1 B 26 B (ARINC 429)
s

P6201
11 TIS/TAS STANDBY* 26 STANDBY / OPERATE
(OPTIONAL) 5 13
11 TAS TEST* 27 FUNCTIONAL TEST

(OPTIONAL) 9
ETHERNET IN 1A 11 ETHERNET OUT A
ETHERNET IN 1B 12 ETHERNET OUT B
ETHERNET OUT 1A 13 ETHERNET IN A
ETHERNET OUT 1B 14 ETHERNET IN B
10 S S

TIS SOURCE
TIS SOURCE
GARMIN
(TRANSPONDER)
GTX 33
GTX 335 GTX 330 8
GDU 620 PFD/MFD
P6203 P3251 P3301
7 13
A 4 5 30 A
12 ARINC 429 IN 7 B ARINC 429 OUT 2
26 6 28 B
s

P6201
13
11 TIS/TAS STANDBY* 26 15 46 TIS CONNECT SELECT

17 GTS 8XX ADS-B Traffic

GDU 620 PFD/MFD GTS 8XX TAS
14 15
P6201 P8001
16
ETHERNET IN 1A 11 52 ETHERNET OUT A
ETHERNET IN 1B 12 53 ETHERNET OUT B
ETHERNET OUT 1A 13 54 ETHERNET IN A
ETHERNET OUT 1B 14 55 ETHERNET IN B
10 S S

Figure C-18 Traffic Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 3

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-30
NOTES:
1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
AT THE GDU 620, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS
3 MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT CHASSIS WITH
AS SHORT A CONDUCTOR AS PRACTICAL.
4 ONLY ONE TRAFFIC SOURCE MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE GDU 620.

THESE OPTIONAL DISCRETE CONNECTIONS ARE NOT REQUIRED IF THE GDU 620 IS CONFIGURED
5 FOR +EXTERNAL CONTROL. IN THIS CASE, THE GDU 620 WILL NOT CONTROL THE TRAFFIC SYSTEM
OPERATION.

GDU 620 MUST BE CONFIGURED FOR THE SPECIFIC TRAFFIC SYSTEM THAT IS CONNECTED (FOR
6 GDU 620 SETUP ITEMS REFER TO SECTION 5.5).

7 GDU 620 MUST BE CONFIGURED FOR GTX 330 TRAFFIC SYSTEM.

THE ARINC 429 OUTPUT MUST BE SET TO GARMIN W/TIS. THE TIS CONNECT SELECT* DISCRETE
8 INPUT MAY BE DRIVEN BY MULTIPLE DISPLAY SOURCES.

Figure C-18 Traffic Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 3

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-31
 OPTIONAL ETHERNET CONNECTIONS ARE ONLY REQUIRED FOR GARMIN TRAFFIC SYSTEMS. USE
9 AIRCRAFT GRADE CATEGORY 5 ETHERNET CABLE. THIS INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING:

MANUFACTURER P/N
CARLISLE INTERCONNECT TECHNOLOGIES 392404 (24 GAUGE)
D100-0824-100 (24 GAUGE)
EMTEQ
D10004-664 (24 GAUGE)
E10424 (24 GAUGE)
PIC WIRE AND CABLE E12424 924 GAUGE)
E51424 (24 GAUGE)
TENSOLITE NF24Q100 (24 GAUGE)
THERMAX MX100Q-24 (24 GAUGE)

10 ANY AVAILABLE ETHERNET PORT MAY BE USED.

DEFAULT DISCRETE OUT FUNCTION FOR THIS PIN IS SHOWN. THIS PIN FUNCTION IS
11 CONFIGURABLE. REFER TO SECTION 5.5 FOR DETAILS.

DEFAULT ARINC 429 INPUT SHOWN. OTHER ARINC 429 INPUT (INPUTS 4 THROUGH 8 ONLY) MAY BE
12 USED. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.8 FOR DETAILS ON HOW TO CONFIGURE THE ARINC 429 INPUTS.

CONNECTION FROM TRAFFIC SYSTEM CAN BE MADE TO BOTH GDUs AS SHOWN, OR ONLY
CONNECTED TO ONE GDU (EITHER PILOT’S OR COPILOT’S) AND TRAFFIC INFORMATION AND
13 CONTROL CROSS-FILLED TO THE OTHER GDU. DIRECT CONNECTION TO EACH GDU IS PREFERRED.
CROSS-FILL OPTION SHOULD ONLY BE USED IF THERE ARE AN INSUFFICIENT NUMBER OF GDU
ARINC 429 INPUTS TO SUPPORT ALL ARINC 429 INTERFACES IN A PARTICULAR INSTALLATION.

GDU 620 MUST BE CONFIGURED FOR A TRAFFIC/ADS-B SETTING OF GTS ADS-B. FOR GDU 620 SETUP
14 ITEMS, REFER TO SECTION 5.

GTS GX0 SOFTWARE V4.00 OR LATER, OR GTS 8X5 SOFTWARE V3.00 IS REQUIRED TO ALLOW THE
GTS 8XX TO RECEIVE PRESSURE ALTITUDE, HEADING, AND GPS DATA OVER THE HSDB INTERFACE.
15 WHEN THE GTS IS CONFIGURED FOR ADS-B IN, THE GTS 8XX WILL PROVIDE 1090 ADS-B TRAFFIC
AND TAS/TCAS TRAFFIC.

NOTE
THE GTS 8XX WILL NOT PROVIDE FIS-B WEATHER.

THE GDU 620 PROVIDES PRESSURE ALTITUDE, HEADING, AND GPS DATA TO THE GTS 8XX OVER THE
16 HSDB INTERFACE. REFER TO THE GTS 8X0 OR THE GTS 8X5 INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR DETAILS
ON HOW TO CONFIGURE THE GTS 8XX TO RECEIVE THIS DATA OVER HSDB.

THIS CONNECTION ONLY APPLIES TO GDU 620 SOFTWARE V7.00 OR LATER, GTS 8X0 SOFTWARE
17 V4.00 OR LATER, OR GTS 8X5 SOFTWARE V3.00 OR LATER. IF EARLIER SOFTWARE VERSIONS ARE
INSTALLED, THE GTS 8XX MUST BE CONNECTED AS A TAS SOURCE SHOWN ABOVE.

Figure C-18 Traffic Interconnect

Sheet 3 of 3

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-32
 GDU 620 PFD/MFD ADF RECEIVER
2 P6201
ADF X/COS IN 17 ADF X/COS OUT
ADF Y/SIN IN 18 ADF Y/SOUT OUT
ADF DC REF IN 36 ADF DC REF OUT

(OPTIONAL) 3
ADF VALID IN 10 SUPER FLAG OUT

NOTES:
1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2 FOR GDU 620 SETUP ITEMS, REFER TO SECTION 5.5.

THE ADF VALID DISCRETE IS ONLY USED BY SOME ADFs. WHEN THE GDU 620 IS CONFIGURED FOR A
PARTICULAR ADF, THE SUPERFLAG BOX SHOULD BE CHECKED OR UNCHECKED AS APPROPRIATE.
3 IF THE SUPERFLAG SIGNAL IS CONNECTED TO THE GDU, THE SUPERFLAG BOX SHOULD BE
CHECKED.

Figure C-19 ADF Interconnect

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-33
 GDU 620 PFD/MFD or GAD 43 ADAPTER
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1
P6203 P431
5 RS-232 IN 7 7 33 RS-232 OUT
RS-232 OUT 7 29 17 RS-232 IN
RS-232 GND 7 50 46 RS-232 GND
s s

GDU 620 PFD/MFD or GAD 43e ADAPTER

GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1
P6203 P431
4
5 RS-232 IN 7 7 33 RS-232 OUT
RS-232 OUT 7 29 17 RS-232 IN
RS-232 GND 7 50 46 RS-232 GND
s s

P432
8 7
ARINC 429 IN 8A 5 43 ARINC 429 OUT 1A
6 ARINC 429 IN 8B 44 ARINC 429 OUT 1B
27
s s
s

GARMIN
GDU 620 #2
(IF INSTALLED)
P6203

6 ARINC 429 IN 8A 5
ARINC 429 IN 8B 8
27
s

Figure C-20 GAD 43/43e Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-34
NOTES:
1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
AT THE GDU 620, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS
3 MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT THE SHIELD GROUNDS AT THE GAD 43/43e TO ITS
CONNECTOR BACKSHELL IN ACCORDANCE WITH GAD 43/43e INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.

4 FOR DUAL GDU 620 INSTALLATIONS, THE GAD 43/43e SHOULD ONLY BE CONNECTED TO GDU #1.

5 FOR GDU 620 SETUP ITEMS, REFER TO SECTION 5.5.

THERE IS NO DEFAULT CONFIGURATION FOR THIS ARINC 429 INPUT. AN UNUSED ARINC 429 INPUT
6 (INPUTS 4 THROUGH 8 ONLY) MUST BE ASSIGNED TO THIS FUNCTION. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.8
FOR DETAILS ON HOW TO CONFIGURE THE ARINC 429 INPUTS.

THIS CONNECTION IS ONLY REQUIRED IF ANALOG NAV (VLOC), ANALOG RADAR ALTITUDE, OR
7 SYNCHRO ADF IS CONNECTED TO THE GAD 43e. DO NOT CONNECT IF THESE FUNCTIONS ARE NOT
BEING UTILIZED.

CONNECTION FROM GAD 43e CAN BE MADE TO BOTH GDUs AS SHOWN, OR ONLY CONNECTED TO
ONE GDU (EITHER PILOT’S OR COPILOT’S) AND GAD 43e NAVIGATION/ADF/RADAR ALTITUDE
INFORMATION CROSS-FILLED TO THE OTHER GDU. DIRECT CONNECTION TO EACH GDU IS
8 PREFERRED. CROSS-FILL OPTION SHOULD ONLY BE USED IF THERE ARE AN INSUFFICIENT NUMBER
OF GDU ARINC 429 INPUTS TO SUPPORT ALL ARINC 429 INTERFACES IN A PARTICULAR
INSTALLATION.

Figure C-20 GAD 43/43e Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-35
 GDU 620 PFD/MFD VIDEO DEVICE
2 P6201

COMPOSITE VIDEO IN 1 (2) 1 (20) RG-179 VIDEO OUT

COMPOSITE VIDEO RTN 1 (2) 22 (22) VIDEO RTN

NOTES:
1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2 FOR GDU 620 SETUP ITEMS, REFER TO SECTION 5.5.

Figure C-21 Video Interconnect

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-36
 GDU 620 PFD/MFD
GSR 56
P6201 P561
GSR STATUS IN* 6 31 STATUS DISCRETE* OUT

P6203
4 GSR REMOTE PWR 47 16 IRIDIUM RMT PWR ON*

RS-232 IN 6 6 12 RS-232 OUT

RS-232 OUT 6 28 13 RS-232 IN
RS-232 GND 6 49 14 SIGNAL GROUND
s s

NOTES:
1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
AT GDU 620, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS
3 MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT THE SHIELD GROUNDS AT THE GRS TO ITS CONNECTOR
BACKSHELL IN ACCORDANCE WITH GSR 56 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.

DEFAULT DISCRETE OUT FUNCTION FOR THIS PIN IS SHOWN. THIS PIN FUNCTION IS
4 CONFIGURABLE. REFER TO SECTION 5.5 FOR DETAILS.

Figure C-22 GSR Interconnect

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-37
 GARMIN
GDU 620 #2
(IF INSTALLED)

P6203
RAD ALT PUSH-TO-TEST 6
n
4 (DISC OUT N)
6
ARINC 429 IN 8A 5
5 ARINC 429 IN 8B 27
s

RADAR ALTIMETER

GARMIN
GDU 620 #1
s

P6203
RAD ALT PUSH-TO-TEST* 6
n PUSH-TO-TEST
4 (DISC OUT N*)
6
ARINC 429 IN 8A 5 ARINC 429 OUT A
5 ARINC 429 IN 8B ARINC 429 OUT B
27
s

NOTES:
1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
AT GDU 620, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS
3 MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT CHASSIS WITH
AS SHORT A CONDUCTOR AS PRACTICAL.

THERE IS NO DEFAULT CONFIGURATION FOR THIS DISCRETE OUTPUT. AN UNUSED DISCRETE

4 OUTPUT MUST BE ASSIGNED TO THIS FUNCTION. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.12 FOR DETAILS ON HOW
TO CONFIGURE THE DISCRETE OUTPUTS.

DEFAULT ARINC 429 INPUT SHOWN. OTHER ARINC 429 INPUTS (INPUTS 4 THROUGH 8 ONLY) MAY BE
5 USED INSTEAD. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.1.8 FOR DETAILS ON HOW TO CONFIGURE THE ARINC 429
INPUTS.

CONNECTION FROM RADAR ALTIMETER CAN BE MADE TO BOTH GDUs AS SHOWN, OR ONLY
CONNECTED TO ONE GDU (EITHER PILOT’S OR COPILOT’S) AND RADAR ALTITUDE INFORMATION
AND CONTROL CROSS-FILLED TO THE OTHER GDU. DIRECT CONNECTION TO EACH GDU IS
6 PREFERRED. CROSS-FILL OPTION SHOULD ONLY BE USED IF THERE ARE AN INSUFFICIENT NUMBER
OF GDU ARINC 429 INPUTS TO SUPPORT ALL ARINC 429 INTERFACES IN A PARTICULAR
INSTALLATION.

Figure C-23 Radar Altimeter Interconnect

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-38
 SINGLE GDU – SINGLE GEA

GDU 620 PFD/MFD 4 GEA 7X #1

P6203 P701
RS-485 1A 9 5 RS-485 1A
RS-485 1B 31 6 RS-485 1B
s s

RS-485 2A 10 NC
RS-485 2B 32

P6201
NORMAL/COMPOSITE IN * 5 NC

DUAL GDU – DUAL GEA

GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1 4 GEA 7X #1

P6203 P701
RS-485 1A 9 5 RS-485 1A
RS-485 1B 31 6 RS-485 1B
s s
7 RS-485 2A
8 RS-485 2B
s

GEA 7X #2
P701
RS-485 2A 10 5 RS-485 1A
RS-485 2B 32 6 RS-485 1B
s s
7 RS-485 2A
8 RS-485 2B
P6201 s

NORMAL/COMPOSITE IN * 5 5

GDU 620 PFD/MFD EIS 4

P6203
RS-485 1A 9
RS-485 1B 31
s
RS-485 2A 10
RS-485 2B 32
s

P6201
NORMAL/COMPOSITE IN * 5 5

Figure C-24 GEA Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-39
 GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1 4 GEA 7X #2
P6203 P701
RS-485 2A 10 5 RS-485 1A
RS-485 2B 32 6 RS-485 1B
s s
7 RS-485 2A
8 RS-485 2B
P6201 s

NORMAL/COMPOSITE IN * 5 5

GDU 620 PFD/MFD EIS 4

P6203
RS-485 2A 10
RS-485 2B 32
s
RS-485 1A 9
RS-485 1B 31
s

P6201
NORMAL/COMPOSITE IN * 5 5
GEA 7X #1
P701
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2 4 5 RS-485 1A
P6203 6 RS-485 1B
s
RS-485 1A 9 7 RS-485 2A
RS-485 1B 31 8 RS-485 2B
s s

P6201
NORMAL/COMPOSITE IN * 5 5

NOTES:
1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
AT GDU 620, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS
3 MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT THE SHIELD GROUNDS AT THE GEA 7X TO THE
CONNECTOR BACKSHELL IN ACCORDANCE WITH GEA 7X INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.

4 FOR GDU 620 SETUP ITEMS, REFER TO SECTION 5.

IF DESIRED, CONNECT THE NORMAL/COMPOSITE INPUT TO A DISPLAY REVERSION SWITCH, TO

5 ALLOW THE DISPLAY TO SWITCH BETWEEN NORMAL TO COMPOSITE MODE. REFER TO
SECTION 4.2.7 FOR DETAILS ABOUT THE DISCRETE OPERATION.

Figure C-24 GEA Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-40
 ADS-B/FIS-B
GTX 345 GDL 88 Source
GDU 620 PFD/MFD P6201 P3252 P881
5
ETHERNET IN 2A 30 6 53 ETHERNET OUT A
4 ETHERNET IN 2B 31 1 54 ETHERNET OUT B 4
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32 7 51 ETHERNET IN A
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33 2 52 ETHERNET IN B
s s

NOTES:
1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
AT THE GDU 620, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS
3 MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT THE SHIELD GROUNDS AT THE GDL 88/88D TO ITS
CONNECTOR BACKSHELL IN ACCORDANCE WITH GDL 88 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.

4 ANY AVAILABLE ETHERNET PORT MAY BE USED.

5 USE AIRCRAFT GRADE CATEGORY 5 ETHERNET CABLE. THIS INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING:

MANUFACTURER P/N
CARLISLE INTERCONNECT TECHNOLOGIES 392404 (24 GAUGE)
D100-0824-100 (24 GAUGE)
EMTEQ
D10004-664 (24 GAUGE)
E10424 (24 GAUGE)
PIC WIRE AND CABLE E12424 (24 GAUGE)
E51424 (24 GAUGE)
TENSOLITE NF24Q100 (24 GAUGE)
THERMAX MX100Q-24 (24 GAUGE)

THE GDL 88 IS NOT AUTHORIZED FOR ROTORCRAFT INSTALLATIONS WITH GDU 620 V7.00. FUTURE
6
GDU 620 SOFTWARE VERSIONS WILL SUPPORT GDL 88 ROTORCRAFT INSTALLATIONS.

Figure C-25 ADS-B/FIS-B Interconnect

190-00601-04 GDU™ 620 Installation Manual

Rev. AD Page C-41